109 files changed, 4594 insertions, 1225 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
index 3731f6f29bcb..873ef1fc1569 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-regulator
@@ -3,8 +3,9 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
-                state. This holds the regulator output state.
+                state. This reports the regulator enable status, for
+                regulators which can report that value.
                This will be one of the following strings:
@@ -18,7 +19,8 @@ Description:
                'disabled' means the regulator output is OFF and is not
                supplying power to the system..
-                'unknown' means software cannot determine the state.
+                'unknown' means software cannot determine the state, or
+                the reported state is invalid.
                NOTE: this field can be used in conjunction with microvolts
                and microamps to determine regulator output levels.
@@ -53,9 +55,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                microvolts. This holds the regulator output voltage setting
-                measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts).
+                measured in microvolts (i.e. E-6 Volts), for regulators
+                which can report that voltage.
                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
                output voltage level as this value is the same regardless of
@@ -67,9 +70,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                microamps. This holds the regulator output current limit
-                setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps).
+                setting measured in microamps (i.e. E-6 Amps), for regulators
+                which can report that current.
                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
                output current level as this value is the same regardless of
@@ -81,8 +85,9 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
-                opmode. This holds the regulator operating mode setting.
+                opmode. This holds the current regulator operating mode,
+                for regulators which can report it.
                The opmode value can be one of the following strings:
@@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ Description:
                'standby'
                'unknown'
-                The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/regulator.h
+                The modes are described in include/linux/regulator/consumer.h
                NOTE: This value should not be used to determine the regulator
                output operating mode as this value is the same regardless of
@@ -104,9 +109,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                min_microvolts. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
-                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts,
+                for regulators which support voltage constraints.
                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
                the power domain has no min microvolts constraint defined by
@@ -118,9 +124,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                max_microvolts. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
-                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts.
+                output voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts,
+                for regulators which support voltage constraints.
                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
                the power domain has no max microvolts constraint defined by
@@ -132,10 +139,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                min_microamps. This holds the minimum safe working regulator
                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
-                microamps.
+                microamps, for regulators which support current constraints.
                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
                the power domain has no min microamps constraint defined by
@@ -147,10 +154,10 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                max_microamps. This holds the maximum safe working regulator
                output current limit setting for this domain measured in
-                microamps.
+                microamps, for regulators which support current constraints.
                NOTE: this will return the string 'constraint not defined' if
                the power domain has no max microamps constraint defined by
@@ -185,7 +192,7 @@ Date:		April 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                requested_microamps. This holds the total requested load
                current in microamps for this regulator from all its consumer
                devices.
@@ -204,125 +211,102 @@ Date:		May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_mem_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
-                the system is suspended to memory.
+                the system is suspended to memory, for voltage regulators
+                implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
-                the power domain has no suspend to memory voltage defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_microvolts
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_disk_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
-                the system is suspended to disk.
+                the system is suspended to disk, for voltage regulators
+                implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
-                the power domain has no suspend to disk voltage defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_microvolts
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_standby_microvolts. This holds the regulator output
                voltage setting for this domain measured in microvolts when
-                the system is suspended to standby.
+                the system is suspended to standby, for voltage regulators
+                implementing suspend voltage configuration constraints.
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
-                the power domain has no suspend to standby voltage defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_mode
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_mem_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
-                memory.
+                memory, for regulators implementing suspend mode
+                configuration constraints.
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
-                the power domain has no suspend to memory mode defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_mode
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_disk_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
-                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk.
+                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to disk,
+                for regulators implementing suspend mode configuration
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
+                constraints.
-                the power domain has no suspend to disk mode defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_mode
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_standby_mode. This holds the regulator operating mode
                setting for this domain when the system is suspended to
-                standby.
+                standby, for regulators implementing suspend mode
+                configuration constraints.
-                NOTE: this will return the string 'not defined' if
-                the power domain has no suspend to standby mode defined by
-                platform code.
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_mem_state
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_mem_state. This holds the regulator operating state
-                when suspended to memory.
+                when suspended to memory, for regulators implementing suspend
+                configuration constraints.
-                This will be one of the following strings:
-                'enabled'
+                This will be one of the same strings reported by
-                'disabled'
+                the "state" attribute.
-                'not defined'
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_disk_state
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_disk_state. This holds the regulator operating state
-                when suspended to disk.
+                when suspended to disk, for regulators implementing
+                suspend configuration constraints.
-                This will be one of the following strings:
-                'enabled'
+                This will be one of the same strings reported by
-                'disabled'
+                the "state" attribute.
-                'not defined'
 What:           /sys/class/regulator/.../suspend_standby_state
 Date:           May 2008
 KernelVersion:  2.6.26
 Contact:        Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk>
 Description:
-                Each regulator directory will contain a field called
+                Some regulator directories will contain a field called
                suspend_standby_state. This holds the regulator operating
-                state when suspended to standby.
+                state when suspended to standby, for regulators implementing
+                suspend configuration constraints.
-                This will be one of the following strings:
-                'enabled'
+                This will be one of the same strings reported by
-                'disabled'
+                the "state" attribute.
-                'not defined'
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc
index a0d18dbeb7a9..6a5fd072849d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-uwb_rc
@@ -32,14 +32,16 @@ Contact:        linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
 Description:
                Write:
-                <channel> [<bpst offset>]
+                <channel>
-                to start beaconing on a specific channel, or stop
+                to force a specific channel to be used when beaconing,
-                beaconing if <channel> is -1.  Valid channels depends
+                or, if <channel> is -1, to prohibit beaconing.  If
-                on the radio controller's supported band groups.
+                <channel> is 0, then the default channel selection
+                algorithm will be used.  Valid channels depends on the
+                radio controller's supported band groups.
-                <bpst offset> may be used to try and join a specific
+                Reading returns the currently active channel, or -1 if
-                beacon group if more than one was found during a scan.
+                the radio controller is not beaconing.
 What:           /sys/class/uwb_rc/uwbN/scan
 Date:           July 2008
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
index 7a16fe1e2270..9fe91c02ee40 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
@@ -6,7 +6,6 @@ Description:
                internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be
                added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove
                operations.
 Users:          hotplug memory add/remove tools
                https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
@@ -19,6 +18,56 @@ Description:
                This is useful for a user-level agent to determine
                identify removable sections of the memory before attempting
                potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation
+Users:          hotplug memory remove tools
+                https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
+What:           /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device
+Date:           September 2008
+Contact:        Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_device
+                is read-only and is designed to show the name of physical
+                memory device.  Implementation is currently incomplete.
+What:           /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index
+Date:           September 2008
+Contact:        Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/phys_index
+                is read-only and contains the section ID in hexadecimal
+                which is equivalent to decimal X contained in the
+                memory section directory name.
+What:           /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
+Date:           September 2008
+Contact:        Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
+                is read-write.  When read, it's contents show the
+                online/offline state of the memory section.  When written,
+                root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable
+                memory section (see removable file description above)
+                using the following commands.
+                # echo online > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
+                # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
+                For example, if /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/removable
+                contains a value of 1 and
+                /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state contains the
+                string "online" the following command can be executed by
+                by root to offline that section.
+                # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memory22/state
 Users:          hotplug memory remove tools
                https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
+What:           /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY
+Date:           September 2008
+Contact:        Gary Hade <garyhade@us.ibm.com>
+Description:
+                When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled
+                /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX/memoryY is a symbolic link that
+                points to the corresponding /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryY
+                memory section directory.  For example, the following symbolic
+                link is created for memory section 9 on node0.
+                /sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9
diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes
index cb2b141b1c3e..b95082be4d5e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Changes
+++ b/Documentation/Changes
@@ -33,10 +33,12 @@ o  Gnu make               3.79.1                  # make --version
 o  binutils               2.12                    # ld -v
 o  util-linux             2.10o                   # fdformat --version
 o  module-init-tools      0.9.10                  # depmod -V
-o  e2fsprogs              1.29                    # tune2fs
+o  e2fsprogs              1.41.4                  # e2fsck -V
 o  jfsutils               1.1.3                   # fsck.jfs -V
 o  reiserfsprogs          3.6.3                   # reiserfsck -V 2>&1|grep reiserfsprogs
 o  xfsprogs               2.6.0                   # xfs_db -V
+o  squashfs-tools         4.0                     # mksquashfs -version
+o  btrfs-progs            0.18                    # btrfsck
 o  pcmciautils            004                     # pccardctl -V
 o  quota-tools            3.09                    # quota -V
 o  PPP                    2.4.0                   # pppd --version
diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle
index 1875e502f872..72968cd5eaf3 100644
--- a/Documentation/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle
@@ -483,17 +483,25 @@ values.  To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
    (* (max steps 1)
       c-basic-offset)))
+(add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
+          (lambda ()
+            ;; Add kernel style
+            (c-add-style
+             "linux-tabs-only"
+             '("linux" (c-offsets-alist
+                        (arglist-cont-nonempty
+                         c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
+                         c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
 (add-hook 'c-mode-hook
          (lambda ()
            (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
              ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
              (when (and filename
-                         (string-match "~/src/linux-trees" filename))
+                         (string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
+                                       filename))
                (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
-                (c-set-style "linux")
+                (c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
-                (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
-                              '(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
-                                c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
 This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
 files below ~/src/linux-trees.
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index b462bb149543..2a3fcc55e981 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 This document describes the DMA API.  For a more gentle introduction
 phrased in terms of the pci_ equivalents (and actual examples) see
-DMA-mapping.txt
+Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt.
 This API is split into two pieces.  Part I describes the API and the
 corresponding pci_ API.  Part II describes the extensions to the API
@@ -170,16 +170,15 @@ Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
 u64
 dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
-After setting the mask with dma_set_mask(), this API returns the
+This API returns the mask that the platform requires to
-actual mask (within that already set) that the platform actually
+operate efficiently.  Usually this means the returned mask
-requires to operate efficiently.  Usually this means the returned mask
 is the minimum required to cover all of memory.  Examining the
 required mask gives drivers with variable descriptor sizes the
 opportunity to use smaller descriptors as necessary.
 Requesting the required mask does not alter the current mask.  If you
-wish to take advantage of it, you should issue another dma_set_mask()
+wish to take advantage of it, you should issue a dma_set_mask()
-call to lower the mask again.
+call to set the mask to the value returned.
 Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
index c74fec8c2351..b2a4d6d244d9 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ mapped only for the time they are actually used and unmapped after the DMA
 transfer.
 The following API will work of course even on platforms where no such
-hardware exists, see e.g. include/asm-i386/pci.h for how it is implemented on
+hardware exists, see e.g. arch/x86/include/asm/pci.h for how it is implemented on
 top of the virt_to_bus interface.
 First of all, you should make sure
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
index 0a08126d3094..dc3154e49279 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml \
            kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
            gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
            genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
-            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml
+            mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
index 627707a3cb9d..59ad69a9d777 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/networking.tmpl
@@ -74,6 +74,14 @@
 !Enet/sunrpc/rpcb_clnt.c
 !Enet/sunrpc/clnt.c
     </sect1>
+     <sect1><title>WiMAX</title>
+!Enet/wimax/op-msg.c
+!Enet/wimax/op-reset.c
+!Enet/wimax/op-rfkill.c
+!Enet/wimax/stack.c
+!Iinclude/net/wimax.h
+!Iinclude/linux/wimax.h
+     </sect1>
  </chapter>
  <chapter id="netdev">
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..53f4f8d3b810
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl
@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+        "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+<book id="regulator-api">
+ <bookinfo>
+  <title>Voltage and current regulator API</title>
+  <authorgroup>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Liam</firstname>
+    <surname>Girdwood</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <address>
+      <email>lrg@slimlogic.co.uk</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+   <author>
+    <firstname>Mark</firstname>
+    <surname>Brown</surname>
+    <affiliation>
+     <orgname>Wolfson Microelectronics</orgname>
+     <address>
+      <email>broonie@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com</email>
+     </address>
+    </affiliation>
+   </author>
+  </authorgroup>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2007-2008</year>
+   <holder>Wolfson Microelectronics</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2008</year>
+   <holder>Liam Girdwood</holder>
+  </copyright>
+  <legalnotice>
+   <para>
+     This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
+     it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
+     License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
+   </para>
+   <para>
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
+     useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
+     warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+     See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+   </para>
+   <para>
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
+     License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
+     Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
+     MA 02111-1307 USA
+   </para>
+   <para>
+     For more details see the file COPYING in the source
+     distribution of Linux.
+   </para>
+  </legalnotice>
+ </bookinfo>
+<toc></toc>
+  <chapter id="intro">
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>
+        This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel
+        interface to control voltage and current regulators.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+        The intention is to allow systems to dynamically control
+        regulator power output in order to save power and prolong
+        battery life.  This applies to both voltage regulators (where
+        voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where current
+        limit is controllable).
+    </para>
+    <para>
+        Note that additional (and currently more complete) documentation
+        is available in the Linux kernel source under
+        <filename>Documentation/power/regulator</filename>.
+    </para>
+    <sect1 id="glossary">
+       <title>Glossary</title>
+       <para>
+        The regulator API uses a number of terms which may not be
+        familiar:
+       </para>
+       <glossary>
+         <glossentry>
+           <glossterm>Regulator</glossterm>
+           <glossdef>
+             <para>
+        Electronic device that supplies power to other devices.  Most
+        regulators can enable and disable their output and some can also
+        control their output voltage or current.
+             </para>
+           </glossdef>
+         </glossentry>
+         <glossentry>
+           <glossterm>Consumer</glossterm>
+           <glossdef>
+             <para>
+        Electronic device which consumes power provided by a regulator.
+        These may either be static, requiring only a fixed supply, or
+        dynamic, requiring active management of the regulator at
+        runtime.
+             </para>
+           </glossdef>
+         </glossentry>
+         <glossentry>
+           <glossterm>Power Domain</glossterm>
+           <glossdef>
+             <para>
+        The electronic circuit supplied by a given regulator, including
+        the regulator and all consumer devices.  The configuration of
+        the regulator is shared between all the components in the
+        circuit.
+             </para>
+           </glossdef>
+         </glossentry>
+         <glossentry>
+           <glossterm>Power Management Integrated Circuit</glossterm>
+           <acronym>PMIC</acronym>
+           <glossdef>
+             <para>
+        An IC which contains numerous regulators and often also other
+        subsystems.  In an embedded system the primary PMIC is often
+        equivalent to a combination of the PSU and southbridge in a
+        desktop system.
+             </para>
+           </glossdef>
+         </glossentry>
+        </glossary>
+     </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="consumer">
+     <title>Consumer driver interface</title>
+     <para>
+       This offers a similar API to the kernel clock framework.
+       Consumer drivers use <link
+       linkend='API-regulator-get'>get</link> and <link
+       linkend='API-regulator-put'>put</link> operations to acquire and
+       release regulators.  Functions are
+       provided to <link linkend='API-regulator-enable'>enable</link>
+       and <link linkend='API-regulator-disable'>disable</link> the
+       reguator and to get and set the runtime parameters of the
+       regulator.
+     </para>
+     <para>
+       When requesting regulators consumers use symbolic names for their
+       supplies, such as "Vcc", which are mapped into actual regulator
+       devices by the machine interface.
+     </para>
+     <para>
+        A stub version of this API is provided when the regulator
+        framework is not in use in order to minimise the need to use
+        ifdefs.
+     </para>
+     <sect1 id="consumer-enable">
+       <title>Enabling and disabling</title>
+       <para>
+         The regulator API provides reference counted enabling and
+         disabling of regulators. Consumer devices use the <function><link
+         linkend='API-regulator-enable'>regulator_enable</link></function>
+         and <function><link
+         linkend='API-regulator-disable'>regulator_disable</link>
+         </function> functions to enable and disable regulators.  Calls
+         to the two functions must be balanced.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+         Note that since multiple consumers may be using a regulator and
+         machine constraints may not allow the regulator to be disabled
+         there is no guarantee that calling
+         <function>regulator_disable</function> will actually cause the
+         supply provided by the regulator to be disabled. Consumer
+         drivers should assume that the regulator may be enabled at all
+         times.
+       </para>
+     </sect1>
+     <sect1 id="consumer-config">
+       <title>Configuration</title>
+       <para>
+         Some consumer devices may need to be able to dynamically
+         configure their supplies.  For example, MMC drivers may need to
+         select the correct operating voltage for their cards.  This may
+         be done while the regulator is enabled or disabled.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+         The <function><link
+         linkend='API-regulator-set-voltage'>regulator_set_voltage</link>
+         </function> and <function><link
+         linkend='API-regulator-set-current-limit'
+         >regulator_set_current_limit</link>
+         </function> functions provide the primary interface for this.
+         Both take ranges of voltages and currents, supporting drivers
+         that do not require a specific value (eg, CPU frequency scaling
+         normally permits the CPU to use a wider range of supply
+         voltages at lower frequencies but does not require that the
+         supply voltage be lowered).  Where an exact value is required
+         both minimum and maximum values should be identical.
+       </para>
+     </sect1>
+     <sect1 id="consumer-callback">
+       <title>Callbacks</title>
+       <para>
+          Callbacks may also be <link
+          linkend='API-regulator-register-notifier'>registered</link>
+          for events such as regulation failures.
+       </para>
+     </sect1>
+   </chapter>
+   <chapter id="driver">
+     <title>Regulator driver interface</title>
+     <para>
+       Drivers for regulator chips <link
+       linkend='API-regulator-register'>register</link> the regulators
+       with the regulator core, providing operations structures to the
+       core.  A <link
+       linkend='API-regulator-notifier-call-chain'>notifier</link> interface
+       allows error conditions to be reported to the core.
+     </para>
+     <para>
+       Registration should be triggered by explicit setup done by the
+       platform, supplying a <link
+       linkend='API-struct-regulator-init-data'>struct
+       regulator_init_data</link> for the regulator containing
+       <link linkend='machine-constraint'>constraint</link> and
+       <link linkend='machine-supply'>supply</link> information.
+     </para>
+   </chapter>
+   <chapter id="machine">
+     <title>Machine interface</title>
+     <para>
+       This interface provides a way to define how regulators are
+       connected to consumers on a given system and what the valid
+       operating parameters are for the system.
+     </para>
+     <sect1 id="machine-supply">
+       <title>Supplies</title>
+       <para>
+         Regulator supplies are specified using <link
+         linkend='API-struct-regulator-consumer-supply'>struct
+         regulator_consumer_supply</link>.  This is done at
+         <link linkend='driver'>driver registration
+         time</link> as part of the machine constraints.
+       </para>
+     </sect1>
+     <sect1 id="machine-constraint">
+       <title>Constraints</title>
+       <para>
+         As well as definining the connections the machine interface
+         also provides constraints definining the operations that
+         clients are allowed to perform and the parameters that may be
+         set.  This is required since generally regulator devices will
+         offer more flexibility than it is safe to use on a given
+         system, for example supporting higher supply voltages than the
+         consumers are rated for.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+         This is done at <link linkend='driver'>driver
+         registration time</link> by providing a <link
+         linkend='API-struct-regulation-constraints'>struct
+         regulation_constraints</link>.
+       </para>
+       <para>
+         The constraints may also specify an initial configuration for the
+         regulator in the constraints, which is particularly useful for
+         use with static consumers.
+       </para>
+     </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="api">
+    <title>API reference</title>
+    <para>
+      Due to limitations of the kernel documentation framework and the
+      existing layout of the source code the entire regulator API is
+      documented here.
+    </para>
+!Iinclude/linux/regulator/consumer.h
+!Iinclude/linux/regulator/machine.h
+!Iinclude/linux/regulator/driver.h
+!Edrivers/regulator/core.c
+  </chapter>
+</book>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
index df87d1b93605..52e1b79ce0e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
@@ -42,6 +42,18 @@ GPL version 2.
 <revhistory>
        <revision>
+        <revnumber>0.7</revnumber>
+        <date>2008-12-23</date>
+        <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
+        <revremark>Added generic platform drivers and offset attribute.</revremark>
+        </revision>
+        <revision>
+        <revnumber>0.6</revnumber>
+        <date>2008-12-05</date>
+        <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
+        <revremark>Added description of portio sysfs attributes.</revremark>
+        </revision>
+        <revision>
        <revnumber>0.5</revnumber>
        <date>2008-05-22</date>
        <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
@@ -306,6 +318,16 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
        pointed to by addr.
        </para>
 </listitem>
+<listitem>
+        <para>
+        <filename>offset</filename>: The offset, in bytes, that has to be
+        added to the pointer returned by <function>mmap()</function> to get
+        to the actual device memory. This is important if the device's memory
+        is not page aligned. Remember that pointers returned by
+        <function>mmap()</function> are always page aligned, so it is good
+        style to always add this offset.
+        </para>
+</listitem>
 </itemizedlist>
 <para>
@@ -318,6 +340,54 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
 offset = N * getpagesize();
 </programlisting>
+<para>
+        Sometimes there is hardware with memory-like regions that can not be
+        mapped with the technique described here, but there are still ways to
+        access them from userspace. The most common example are x86 ioports.
+        On x86 systems, userspace can access these ioports using
+        <function>ioperm()</function>, <function>iopl()</function>,
+        <function>inb()</function>, <function>outb()</function>, and similar
+        functions.
+</para>
+<para>
+        Since these ioport regions can not be mapped, they will not appear under
+        <filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/</filename> like the normal memory
+        described above. Without information about the port regions a hardware
+        has to offer, it becomes difficult for the userspace part of the
+        driver to find out which ports belong to which UIO device.
+</para>
+<para>
+        To address this situation, the new directory
+        <filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/</filename> was added. It only
+        exists if the driver wants to pass information about one or more port
+        regions to userspace. If that is the case, subdirectories named
+        <filename>port0</filename>, <filename>port1</filename>, and so on,
+        will appear underneath
+        <filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/portio/</filename>.
+</para>
+<para>
+        Each <filename>portX/</filename> directory contains three read-only
+        files that show start, size, and type of the port region:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>
+        <para>
+        <filename>start</filename>: The first port of this region.
+        </para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+        <para>
+        <filename>size</filename>: The number of ports in this region.
+        </para>
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+        <para>
+        <filename>porttype</filename>: A string describing the type of port.
+        </para>
+</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
 </sect1>
 </chapter>
@@ -339,12 +409,12 @@ offset = N * getpagesize();
 <itemizedlist>
 <listitem><para>
-<varname>char *name</varname>: Required. The name of your driver as
+<varname>const char *name</varname>: Required. The name of your driver as
 it will appear in sysfs. I recommend using the name of your module for this.
 </para></listitem>
 <listitem><para>
-<varname>char *version</varname>: Required. This string appears in
+<varname>const char *version</varname>: Required. This string appears in
 <filename>/sys/class/uio/uioX/version</filename>.
 </para></listitem>
@@ -356,6 +426,13 @@ See the description below for details.
 </para></listitem>
 <listitem><para>
+<varname>struct uio_port port[ MAX_UIO_PORTS_REGIONS ]</varname>: Required
+if you want to pass information about ioports to userspace. For each port
+region you need to fill one of the <varname>uio_port</varname> structures.
+See the description below for details.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
 <varname>long irq</varname>: Required. If your hardware generates an
 interrupt, it's your modules task to determine the irq number during
 initialization. If you don't have a hardware generated interrupt but
@@ -448,6 +525,42 @@ Please do not touch the <varname>kobj</varname> element of
 <varname>struct uio_mem</varname>! It is used by the UIO framework
 to set up sysfs files for this mapping. Simply leave it alone.
 </para>
+<para>
+Sometimes, your device can have one or more port regions which can not be
+mapped to userspace. But if there are other possibilities for userspace to
+access these ports, it makes sense to make information about the ports
+available in sysfs. For each region, you have to set up a
+<varname>struct uio_port</varname> in the <varname>port[]</varname> array.
+Here's a description of the fields of <varname>struct uio_port</varname>:
+</para>
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem><para>
+<varname>char *porttype</varname>: Required. Set this to one of the predefined
+constants. Use <varname>UIO_PORT_X86</varname> for the ioports found in x86
+architectures.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<varname>unsigned long start</varname>: Required if the port region is used.
+Fill in the number of the first port of this region.
+</para></listitem>
+<listitem><para>
+<varname>unsigned long size</varname>: Fill in the number of ports in this
+region. If <varname>size</varname> is zero, the region is considered unused.
+Note that you <emphasis>must</emphasis> initialize <varname>size</varname>
+with zero for all unused regions.
+</para></listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+<para>
+Please do not touch the <varname>portio</varname> element of
+<varname>struct uio_port</varname>! It is used internally by the UIO
+framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone.
+</para>
 </sect1>
 <sect1 id="adding_irq_handler">
@@ -497,6 +610,78 @@ to set up sysfs files for this mapping. Simply leave it alone.
        </para>
 </sect1>
+<sect1 id="using_uio_pdrv">
+<title>Using uio_pdrv for platform devices</title>
+        <para>
+        In many cases, UIO drivers for platform devices can be handled in a
+        generic way. In the same place where you define your
+        <varname>struct platform_device</varname>, you simply also implement
+        your interrupt handler and fill your
+        <varname>struct uio_info</varname>. A pointer to this
+        <varname>struct uio_info</varname> is then used as
+        <varname>platform_data</varname> for your platform device.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        You also need to set up an array of <varname>struct resource</varname>
+        containing addresses and sizes of your memory mappings. This
+        information is passed to the driver using the
+        <varname>.resource</varname> and <varname>.num_resources</varname>
+        elements of <varname>struct platform_device</varname>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        You now have to set the <varname>.name</varname> element of
+        <varname>struct platform_device</varname> to
+        <varname>"uio_pdrv"</varname> to use the generic UIO platform device
+        driver. This driver will fill the <varname>mem[]</varname> array
+        according to the resources given, and register the device.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        The advantage of this approach is that you only have to edit a file
+        you need to edit anyway. You do not have to create an extra driver.
+        </para>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="using_uio_pdrv_genirq">
+<title>Using uio_pdrv_genirq for platform devices</title>
+        <para>
+        Especially in embedded devices, you frequently find chips where the
+        irq pin is tied to its own dedicated interrupt line. In such cases,
+        where you can be really sure the interrupt is not shared, we can take
+        the concept of <varname>uio_pdrv</varname> one step further and use a
+        generic interrupt handler. That's what
+        <varname>uio_pdrv_genirq</varname> does.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        The setup for this driver is the same as described above for
+        <varname>uio_pdrv</varname>, except that you do not implement an
+        interrupt handler. The <varname>.handler</varname> element of
+        <varname>struct uio_info</varname> must remain
+        <varname>NULL</varname>. The  <varname>.irq_flags</varname> element
+        must not contain <varname>IRQF_SHARED</varname>.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        You will set the <varname>.name</varname> element of
+        <varname>struct platform_device</varname> to
+        <varname>"uio_pdrv_genirq"</varname> to use this driver.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        The generic interrupt handler of <varname>uio_pdrv_genirq</varname>
+        will simply disable the interrupt line using
+        <function>disable_irq_nosync()</function>. After doing its work,
+        userspace can reenable the interrupt by writing 0x00000001 to the UIO
+        device file. The driver already implements an
+        <function>irq_control()</function> to make this possible, you must not
+        implement your own.
+        </para>
+        <para>
+        Using <varname>uio_pdrv_genirq</varname> not only saves a few lines of
+        interrupt handler code. You also do not need to know anything about
+        the chip's internal registers to create the kernel part of the driver.
+        All you need to know is the irq number of the pin the chip is
+        connected to.
+        </para>
+</sect1>
 </chapter>
 <chapter id="userspace_driver" xreflabel="Writing a driver in user space">
diff --git a/Documentation/IO-mapping.txt b/Documentation/IO-mapping.txt
index 86edb61bdee6..78a440695e11 100644
--- a/Documentation/IO-mapping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/IO-mapping.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 [ NOTE: The virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() functions have been
-        superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA
+        superseded by the functionality provided by the PCI DMA interface
-        interface (see Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt).  They continue
+        (see Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt).  They continue
        to be documented below for historical purposes, but new code
        must not use them. --davidm 00/12/12 ]
diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
index fd4907a2968c..7f6de6ea5b47 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/pci.txt
@@ -294,7 +294,8 @@ NOTE: pci_enable_device() can fail! Check the return value.
 pci_set_master() will enable DMA by setting the bus master bit
 in the PCI_COMMAND register. It also fixes the latency timer value if
-it's set to something bogus by the BIOS.
+it's set to something bogus by the BIOS.  pci_clear_master() will
+disable DMA by clearing the bus master bit.
 If the PCI device can use the PCI Memory-Write-Invalidate transaction,
 call pci_set_mwi().  This enables the PCI_COMMAND bit for Mem-Wr-Inval
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX
index 7dc0695a8f90..9bb62f7b89c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX
@@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ rcuref.txt
        - Reference-count design for elements of lists/arrays protected by RCU
 rcu.txt
        - RCU Concepts
+rcubarrier.txt
+        - Unloading modules that use RCU callbacks
 RTFP.txt
        - List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980.
 torture.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..909602d409bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+RCU and Unloadable Modules
+[Originally published in LWN Jan. 14, 2007: http://lwn.net/Articles/217484/]
+RCU (read-copy update) is a synchronization mechanism that can be thought
+of as a replacement for read-writer locking (among other things), but with
+very low-overhead readers that are immune to deadlock, priority inversion,
+and unbounded latency. RCU read-side critical sections are delimited
+by rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock(), which, in non-CONFIG_PREEMPT
+kernels, generate no code whatsoever.
+This means that RCU writers are unaware of the presence of concurrent
+readers, so that RCU updates to shared data must be undertaken quite
+carefully, leaving an old version of the data structure in place until all
+pre-existing readers have finished. These old versions are needed because
+such readers might hold a reference to them. RCU updates can therefore be
+rather expensive, and RCU is thus best suited for read-mostly situations.
+How can an RCU writer possibly determine when all readers are finished,
+given that readers might well leave absolutely no trace of their
+presence? There is a synchronize_rcu() primitive that blocks until all
+pre-existing readers have completed. An updater wishing to delete an
+element p from a linked list might do the following, while holding an
+appropriate lock, of course:
+        list_del_rcu(p);
+        synchronize_rcu();
+        kfree(p);
+But the above code cannot be used in IRQ context -- the call_rcu()
+primitive must be used instead. This primitive takes a pointer to an
+rcu_head struct placed within the RCU-protected data structure and
+another pointer to a function that may be invoked later to free that
+structure. Code to delete an element p from the linked list from IRQ
+context might then be as follows:
+        list_del_rcu(p);
+        call_rcu(&p->rcu, p_callback);
+Since call_rcu() never blocks, this code can safely be used from within
+IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows:
+        static void p_callback(struct rcu_head *rp)
+        {
+                struct pstruct *p = container_of(rp, struct pstruct, rcu);
+                kfree(p);
+        }
+Unloading Modules That Use call_rcu()
+But what if p_callback is defined in an unloadable module?
+If we unload the module while some RCU callbacks are pending,
+the CPUs executing these callbacks are going to be severely
+disappointed when they are later invoked, as fancifully depicted at
+http://lwn.net/images/ns/kernel/rcu-drop.jpg.
+We could try placing a synchronize_rcu() in the module-exit code path,
+but this is not sufficient. Although synchronize_rcu() does wait for a
+grace period to elapse, it does not wait for the callbacks to complete.
+One might be tempted to try several back-to-back synchronize_rcu()
+calls, but this is still not guaranteed to work. If there is a very
+heavy RCU-callback load, then some of the callbacks might be deferred
+in order to allow other processing to proceed. Such deferral is required
+in realtime kernels in order to avoid excessive scheduling latencies.
+rcu_barrier()
+We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive. This primitive is similar
+to synchronize_rcu(), but instead of waiting solely for a grace
+period to elapse, it also waits for all outstanding RCU callbacks to
+complete. Pseudo-code using rcu_barrier() is as follows:
+   1. Prevent any new RCU callbacks from being posted.
+   2. Execute rcu_barrier().
+   3. Allow the module to be unloaded.
+Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
+The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier in its exit function
+as follows:
+ 1 static void
+ 2 rcu_torture_cleanup(void)
+ 3 {
+ 4   int i;
+ 5
+ 6   fullstop = 1;
+ 7   if (shuffler_task != NULL) {
+ 8     VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_shuffle task");
+ 9     kthread_stop(shuffler_task);
+10   }
+11   shuffler_task = NULL;
+12
+13   if (writer_task != NULL) {
+14     VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_writer task");
+15     kthread_stop(writer_task);
+16   }
+17   writer_task = NULL;
+18
+19   if (reader_tasks != NULL) {
+20     for (i = 0; i < nrealreaders; i++) {
+21       if (reader_tasks[i] != NULL) {
+22         VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING(
+23           "Stopping rcu_torture_reader task");
+24         kthread_stop(reader_tasks[i]);
+25       }
+26       reader_tasks[i] = NULL;
+27     }
+28     kfree(reader_tasks);
+29     reader_tasks = NULL;
+30   }
+31   rcu_torture_current = NULL;
+32
+33   if (fakewriter_tasks != NULL) {
+34     for (i = 0; i < nfakewriters; i++) {
+35       if (fakewriter_tasks[i] != NULL) {
+36         VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING(
+37           "Stopping rcu_torture_fakewriter task");
+38         kthread_stop(fakewriter_tasks[i]);
+39       }
+40       fakewriter_tasks[i] = NULL;
+41     }
+42     kfree(fakewriter_tasks);
+43     fakewriter_tasks = NULL;
+44   }
+45
+46   if (stats_task != NULL) {
+47     VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_stats task");
+48     kthread_stop(stats_task);
+49   }
+50   stats_task = NULL;
+51
+52   /* Wait for all RCU callbacks to fire. */
+53   rcu_barrier();
+54
+55   rcu_torture_stats_print(); /* -After- the stats thread is stopped! */
+56
+57   if (cur_ops->cleanup != NULL)
+58     cur_ops->cleanup();
+59   if (atomic_read(&n_rcu_torture_error))
+60     rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: FAILURE");
+61   else
+62     rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: SUCCESS");
+63 }
+Line 6 sets a global variable that prevents any RCU callbacks from
+re-posting themselves. This will not be necessary in most cases, since
+RCU callbacks rarely include calls to call_rcu(). However, the rcutorture
+module is an exception to this rule, and therefore needs to set this
+global variable.
+Lines 7-50 stop all the kernel tasks associated with the rcutorture
+module. Therefore, once execution reaches line 53, no more rcutorture
+RCU callbacks will be posted. The rcu_barrier() call on line 53 waits
+for any pre-existing callbacks to complete.
+Then lines 55-62 print status and do operation-specific cleanup, and
+then return, permitting the module-unload operation to be completed.
+Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
+        be required?
+Your module might have additional complications. For example, if your
+module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all
+the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining
+RCU callbacks to complete.
+Implementing rcu_barrier()
+Dipankar Sarma's implementation of rcu_barrier() makes use of the fact
+that RCU callbacks are never reordered once queued on one of the per-CPU
+queues. His implementation queues an RCU callback on each of the per-CPU
+callback queues, and then waits until they have all started executing, at
+which point, all earlier RCU callbacks are guaranteed to have completed.
+The original code for rcu_barrier() was as follows:
+ 1 void rcu_barrier(void)
+ 2 {
+ 3   BUG_ON(in_interrupt());
+ 4   /* Take cpucontrol mutex to protect against CPU hotplug */
+ 5   mutex_lock(&rcu_barrier_mutex);
+ 6   init_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion);
+ 7   atomic_set(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count, 0);
+ 8   on_each_cpu(rcu_barrier_func, NULL, 0, 1);
+ 9   wait_for_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion);
+10   mutex_unlock(&rcu_barrier_mutex);
+11 }
+Line 3 verifies that the caller is in process context, and lines 5 and 10
+use rcu_barrier_mutex to ensure that only one rcu_barrier() is using the
+global completion and counters at a time, which are initialized on lines
+6 and 7. Line 8 causes each CPU to invoke rcu_barrier_func(), which is
+shown below. Note that the final "1" in on_each_cpu()'s argument list
+ensures that all the calls to rcu_barrier_func() will have completed
+before on_each_cpu() returns. Line 9 then waits for the completion.
+This code was rewritten in 2008 to support rcu_barrier_bh() and
+rcu_barrier_sched() in addition to the original rcu_barrier().
+The rcu_barrier_func() runs on each CPU, where it invokes call_rcu()
+to post an RCU callback, as follows:
+ 1 static void rcu_barrier_func(void *notused)
+ 2 {
+ 3 int cpu = smp_processor_id();
+ 4 struct rcu_data *rdp = &per_cpu(rcu_data, cpu);
+ 5 struct rcu_head *head;
+ 6
+ 7 head = &rdp->barrier;
+ 8 atomic_inc(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count);
+ 9 call_rcu(head, rcu_barrier_callback);
+10 }
+Lines 3 and 4 locate RCU's internal per-CPU rcu_data structure,
+which contains the struct rcu_head that needed for the later call to
+call_rcu(). Line 7 picks up a pointer to this struct rcu_head, and line
+8 increments a global counter. This counter will later be decremented
+by the callback. Line 9 then registers the rcu_barrier_callback() on
+the current CPU's queue.
+The rcu_barrier_callback() function simply atomically decrements the
+rcu_barrier_cpu_count variable and finalizes the completion when it
+reaches zero, as follows:
+ 1 static void rcu_barrier_callback(struct rcu_head *notused)
+ 2 {
+ 3 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count))
+ 4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion);
+ 5 }
+Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
+        immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
+        value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
+        are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
+        rcu_barrier() returning prematurely?
+rcu_barrier() Summary
+The rcu_barrier() primitive has seen relatively little use, since most
+code using RCU is in the core kernel rather than in modules. However, if
+you are using RCU from an unloadable module, you need to use rcu_barrier()
+so that your module may be safely unloaded.
+Answers to Quick Quizzes
+Quick Quiz #1: Why is there no srcu_barrier()?
+Answer: Since there is no call_srcu(), there can be no outstanding SRCU
+        callbacks. Therefore, there is no need to wait for them.
+Quick Quiz #2: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might
+        be required?
+Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally
+        implemented for module unloading. Nikita Danilov was using
+        RCU in a filesystem, which resulted in a similar situation at
+        filesystem-unmount time. Dipankar Sarma coded up rcu_barrier()
+        in response, so that Nikita could invoke it during the
+        filesystem-unmount process.
+        Much later, yours truly hit the RCU module-unload problem when
+        implementing rcutorture, and found that rcu_barrier() solves
+        this problem as well.
+Quick Quiz #3: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes
+        immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the
+        value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations
+        are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in
+        rcu_barrier() returning prematurely?
+Answer: This cannot happen. The reason is that on_each_cpu() has its last
+        argument, the wait flag, set to "1". This flag is passed through
+        to smp_call_function() and further to smp_call_function_on_cpu(),
+        causing this latter to spin until the cross-CPU invocation of
+        rcu_barrier_func() has completed. This by itself would prevent
+        a grace period from completing on non-CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels,
+        since each CPU must undergo a context switch (or other quiescent
+        state) before the grace period can complete. However, this is
+        of no use in CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels.
+        Therefore, on_each_cpu() disables preemption across its call
+        to smp_call_function() and also across the local call to
+        rcu_barrier_func(). This prevents the local CPU from context
+        switching, again preventing grace periods from completing. This
+        means that all CPUs have executed rcu_barrier_func() before
+        the first rcu_barrier_callback() can possibly execute, in turn
+        preventing rcu_barrier_cpu_count from prematurely reaching zero.
+        Currently, -rt implementations of RCU keep but a single global
+        queue for RCU callbacks, and thus do not suffer from this
+        problem. However, when the -rt RCU eventually does have per-CPU
+        callback queues, things will have to change. One simple change
+        is to add an rcu_read_lock() before line 8 of rcu_barrier()
+        and an rcu_read_unlock() after line 8 of this same function. If
+        you can think of a better change, please let me know!
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index cc49400b4af8..7ea231172c85 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -392,6 +392,10 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[])
                        goto err;
                }
        }
+        if (!maskset && !tid && !containerset) {
+                usage();
+                goto err;
+        }
        do {
                int i;
diff --git a/Documentation/bad_memory.txt b/Documentation/bad_memory.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..df8416213202
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bad_memory.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+March 2008
+Jan-Simon Moeller, dl9pf@gmx.de
+How to deal with bad memory e.g. reported by memtest86+ ?
+#########################################################
+There are three possibilities I know of:
+1) Reinsert/swap the memory modules
+2) Buy new modules (best!) or try to exchange the memory
+   if you have spare-parts
+3) Use BadRAM or memmap
+This Howto is about number 3) .
+BadRAM
+######
+BadRAM is the actively developed and available as kernel-patch
+here:  http://rick.vanrein.org/linux/badram/
+For more details see the BadRAM documentation.
+memmap
+######
+memmap is already in the kernel and usable as kernel-parameter at
+boot-time.  Its syntax is slightly strange and you may need to
+calculate the values by yourself!
+Syntax to exclude a memory area (see kernel-parameters.txt for details):
+memmap=<size>$<address>
+Example: memtest86+ reported here errors at address 0x18691458, 0x18698424 and
+         some others. All had 0x1869xxxx in common, so I chose a pattern of
+         0x18690000,0xffff0000.
+With the numbers of the example above:
+memmap=64K$0x18690000
+ or
+memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX b/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX
index 7cb3b356b249..d6840a91e1e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX
@@ -9,3 +9,6 @@ cachefeatures.txt
 Filesystems
        - Requirements for mounting the root file system.
+bfin-gpio-note.txt
+        - Notes in developing/using bfin-gpio driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9898c7ded7d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+ * File:         Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-note.txt
+ * Based on:
+ * Author:
+ *
+ * Created:      $Id: bfin-gpio-note.txt 2008-11-24 16:42 grafyang $
+ * Description:  This file contains the notes in developing/using bfin-gpio.
+ *
+ *
+ * Rev:
+ *
+ * Modified:
+ *               Copyright 2004-2008 Analog Devices Inc.
+ *
+ * Bugs:         Enter bugs at http://blackfin.uclinux.org/
+ *
+ */
+1. Blackfin GPIO introduction
+    There are many GPIO pins on Blackfin. Most of these pins are muxed to
+    multi-functions. They can be configured as peripheral, or just as GPIO,
+    configured to input with interrupt enabled, or output.
+    For detailed information, please see "arch/blackfin/kernel/bfin_gpio.c",
+    or the relevant HRM.
+2. Avoiding resource conflict
+    Followed function groups are used to avoiding resource conflict,
+    - Use the pin as peripheral,
+        int peripheral_request(unsigned short per, const char *label);
+        int peripheral_request_list(const unsigned short per[], const char *label);
+        void peripheral_free(unsigned short per);
+        void peripheral_free_list(const unsigned short per[]);
+    - Use the pin as GPIO,
+        int bfin_gpio_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label);
+        void bfin_gpio_free(unsigned gpio);
+    - Use the pin as GPIO interrupt,
+        int bfin_gpio_irq_request(unsigned gpio, const char *label);
+        void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio);
+    The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin,
+    the free functions will clear it's function state.
+    Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by
+    previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request
+    function fail.
+    These functions are wrapped by other functions, most of the users need not
+    care.
+3. But there are some exceptions
+    - Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested both as GPIO and GPIO
+    interrut.
+    Some drivers, like gpio-keys, need this behavior. Kernel only print out
+    warning messages like,
+        bfin-gpio: GPIO 24 is already reserved by gpio-keys: BTN0, and you are
+configuring it as IRQ!
+        Note: Consider the case that, if there are two drivers need the
+        identical GPIO, one of them use it as GPIO, the other use it as
+        GPIO interrupt. This will really cause resource conflict. So if
+        there is any abnormal driver behavior, please check the bfin-gpio
+        warning messages.
+    - Kernel permit the identical GPIO be requested from the same driver twice.
diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
index 3c5434c83daf..ecad6ee75705 100644
--- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
@@ -186,8 +186,9 @@ a virtual address mapping (unlike the earlier scheme of virtual address
 do not have a corresponding kernel virtual address space mapping) and
 low-memory pages.
-Note: Please refer to DMA-mapping.txt for a discussion on PCI high mem DMA
+Note: Please refer to Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for a discussion
-aspects and mapping of scatter gather lists, and support for 64 bit PCI.
+on PCI high mem DMA aspects and mapping of scatter gather lists, and support
+for 64 bit PCI.
 Special handling is required only for cases where i/o needs to happen on
 pages at physical memory addresses beyond what the device can support. In these
@@ -953,14 +954,14 @@ elevator_allow_merge_fn		called whenever the block layer determines
                                results in some sort of conflict internally,
                                this hook allows it to do that.
-elevator_dispatch_fn            fills the dispatch queue with ready requests.
+elevator_dispatch_fn*           fills the dispatch queue with ready requests.
                                I/O schedulers are free to postpone requests by
                                not filling the dispatch queue unless @force
                                is non-zero.  Once dispatched, I/O schedulers
                                are not allowed to manipulate the requests -
                                they belong to generic dispatch queue.
-elevator_add_req_fn             called to add a new request into the scheduler
+elevator_add_req_fn*            called to add a new request into the scheduler
 elevator_queue_empty_fn         returns true if the merge queue is empty.
                                Drivers shouldn't use this, but rather check
@@ -990,7 +991,7 @@ elevator_activate_req_fn	Called when device driver first sees a request.
 elevator_deactivate_req_fn      Called when device driver decides to delay
                                a request by requeueing it.
-elevator_init_fn
+elevator_init_fn*
 elevator_exit_fn                Allocate and free any elevator specific storage
                                for a queue.
diff --git a/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt b/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e164403f60e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/block/queue-sysfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+Queue sysfs files
+=================
+This text file will detail the queue files that are located in the sysfs tree
+for each block device. Note that stacked devices typically do not export
+any settings, since their queue merely functions are a remapping target.
+These files are the ones found in the /sys/block/xxx/queue/ directory.
+Files denoted with a RO postfix are readonly and the RW postfix means
+read-write.
+hw_sector_size (RO)
+-------------------
+This is the hardware sector size of the device, in bytes.
+max_hw_sectors_kb (RO)
+----------------------
+This is the maximum number of kilobytes supported in a single data transfer.
+max_sectors_kb (RW)
+-------------------
+This is the maximum number of kilobytes that the block layer will allow
+for a filesystem request. Must be smaller than or equal to the maximum
+size allowed by the hardware.
+nomerges (RW)
+-------------
+This enables the user to disable the lookup logic involved with IO merging
+requests in the block layer. Merging may still occur through a direct
+1-hit cache, since that comes for (almost) free. The IO scheduler will not
+waste cycles doing tree/hash lookups for merges if nomerges is 1. Defaults
+to 0, enabling all merges.
+nr_requests (RW)
+----------------
+This controls how many requests may be allocated in the block layer for
+read or write requests. Note that the total allocated number may be twice
+this amount, since it applies only to reads or writes (not the accumulated
+sum).
+read_ahead_kb (RW)
+------------------
+Maximum number of kilobytes to read-ahead for filesystems on this block
+device.
+rq_affinity (RW)
+----------------
+If this option is enabled, the block layer will migrate request completions
+to the CPU that originally submitted the request. For some workloads
+this provides a significant reduction in CPU cycles due to caching effects.
+scheduler (RW)
+--------------
+When read, this file will display the current and available IO schedulers
+for this block device. The currently active IO scheduler will be enclosed
+in [] brackets. Writing an IO scheduler name to this file will switch
+control of this block device to that new IO scheduler. Note that writing
+an IO scheduler name to this file will attempt to load that IO scheduler
+module, if it isn't already present in the system.
+Jens Axboe <jens.axboe@oracle.com>, February 2009
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index d9014aa0eb68..d9e5d6f41b92 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
                                CGROUPS
                                -------
-Written by Paul Menage <menage@google.com> based on Documentation/cpusets.txt
+Written by Paul Menage <menage@google.com> based on
+Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
 Original copyright statements from cpusets.txt:
 Portions Copyright (C) 2004 BULL SA.
@@ -68,7 +69,7 @@ On their own, the only use for cgroups is for simple job
 tracking. The intention is that other subsystems hook into the generic
 cgroup support to provide new attributes for cgroups, such as
 accounting/limiting the resources which processes in a cgroup can
-access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cpusets.txt) allows
+access. For example, cpusets (see Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt) allows
 you to associate a set of CPUs and a set of memory nodes with the
 tasks in each cgroup.
@@ -227,7 +228,6 @@ Each cgroup is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system
 containing the following files describing that cgroup:
 - tasks: list of tasks (by pid) attached to that cgroup
- - releasable flag: cgroup currently removeable?
 - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit?
 - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file
   exists in the top cgroup only)
@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ Now you want to do something with this cgroup.
 In this directory you can find several files:
 # ls
-notify_on_release releasable tasks
+notify_on_release tasks
 (plus whatever files added by the attached subsystems)
 Now attach your shell to this cgroup:
@@ -479,7 +479,6 @@ newly-created cgroup if an error occurs after this subsystem's
 create() method has been called for the new cgroup).
 void pre_destroy(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp);
-(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 Called before checking the reference count on each subsystem. This may
 be useful for subsystems which have some extra references even if
@@ -498,6 +497,7 @@ remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex.
 void attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
            struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 Called after the task has been attached to the cgroup, to allow any
 post-attachment activity that requires memory allocations or blocking.
@@ -511,6 +511,7 @@ void exit(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct task_struct *task)
 Called during task exit.
 int populate(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 Called after creation of a cgroup to allow a subsystem to populate
 the cgroup directory with file entries.  The subsystem should make
@@ -520,6 +521,7 @@ method can return an error code, the error code is currently not
 always handled well.
 void post_clone(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
 Called at the end of cgroup_clone() to do any paramater
 initialization which might be required before a task could attach.  For
@@ -527,7 +529,7 @@ example in cpusets, no task may attach before 'cpus' and 'mems' are set
 up.
 void bind(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *root)
-(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
+(cgroup_mutex and ss->hierarchy_mutex held by caller)
 Called when a cgroup subsystem is rebound to a different hierarchy
 and root cgroup. Currently this will only involve movement between
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpuacct.txt
index bb775fbe43d7..bb775fbe43d7 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/cpuacct.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpuacct.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
index 5c86c258c791..5c86c258c791 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/devices.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt
index 7cc6e6a60672..7cc6e6a60672 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/devices.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..523a9c16c400
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,362 @@
+Memory Resource Controller(Memcg)  Implementation Memo.
+Last Updated: 2009/1/19
+Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.29-rc2.
+Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior
+is complex. This is a document for memcg's internal behavior.
+Please note that implementation details can be changed.
+(*) Topics on API should be in Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt)
+0. How to record usage ?
+   2 objects are used.
+   page_cgroup ....an object per page.
+        Allocated at boot or memory hotplug. Freed at memory hot removal.
+   swap_cgroup ... an entry per swp_entry.
+        Allocated at swapon(). Freed at swapoff().
+   The page_cgroup has USED bit and double count against a page_cgroup never
+   occurs. swap_cgroup is used only when a charged page is swapped-out.
+1. Charge
+   a page/swp_entry may be charged (usage += PAGE_SIZE) at
+        mem_cgroup_newpage_charge()
+          Called at new page fault and Copy-On-Write.
+        mem_cgroup_try_charge_swapin()
+          Called at do_swap_page() (page fault on swap entry) and swapoff.
+          Followed by charge-commit-cancel protocol. (With swap accounting)
+          At commit, a charge recorded in swap_cgroup is removed.
+        mem_cgroup_cache_charge()
+          Called at add_to_page_cache()
+        mem_cgroup_cache_charge_swapin()
+          Called at shmem's swapin.
+        mem_cgroup_prepare_migration()
+          Called before migration. "extra" charge is done and followed by
+          charge-commit-cancel protocol.
+          At commit, charge against oldpage or newpage will be committed.
+2. Uncharge
+  a page/swp_entry may be uncharged (usage -= PAGE_SIZE) by
+        mem_cgroup_uncharge_page()
+          Called when an anonymous page is fully unmapped. I.e., mapcount goes
+          to 0. If the page is SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until
+          mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache().
+        mem_cgroup_uncharge_cache_page()
+          Called when a page-cache is deleted from radix-tree. If the page is
+          SwapCache, uncharge is delayed until mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache().
+        mem_cgroup_uncharge_swapcache()
+          Called when SwapCache is removed from radix-tree. The charge itself
+          is moved to swap_cgroup. (If mem+swap controller is disabled, no
+          charge to swap occurs.)
+        mem_cgroup_uncharge_swap()
+          Called when swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0. A charge against swap
+          disappears.
+        mem_cgroup_end_migration(old, new)
+        At success of migration old is uncharged (if necessary), a charge
+        to new page is committed. At failure, charge to old page is committed.
+3. charge-commit-cancel
+        In some case, we can't know this "charge" is valid or not at charging
+        (because of races).
+        To handle such case, there are charge-commit-cancel functions.
+                mem_cgroup_try_charge_XXX
+                mem_cgroup_commit_charge_XXX
+                mem_cgroup_cancel_charge_XXX
+        these are used in swap-in and migration.
+        At try_charge(), there are no flags to say "this page is charged".
+        at this point, usage += PAGE_SIZE.
+        At commit(), the function checks the page should be charged or not
+        and set flags or avoid charging.(usage -= PAGE_SIZE)
+        At cancel(), simply usage -= PAGE_SIZE.
+Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
+4. Anonymous
+        Anonymous page is newly allocated at
+                  - page fault into MAP_ANONYMOUS mapping.
+                  - Copy-On-Write.
+        It is charged right after it's allocated before doing any page table
+        related operations. Of course, it's uncharged when another page is used
+        for the fault address.
+        At freeing anonymous page (by exit() or munmap()), zap_pte() is called
+        and pages for ptes are freed one by one.(see mm/memory.c). Uncharges
+        are done at page_remove_rmap() when page_mapcount() goes down to 0.
+        Another page freeing is by page-reclaim (vmscan.c) and anonymous
+        pages are swapped out. In this case, the page is marked as
+        PageSwapCache(). uncharge() routine doesn't uncharge the page marked
+        as SwapCache(). It's delayed until __delete_from_swap_cache().
+        4.1 Swap-in.
+        At swap-in, the page is taken from swap-cache. There are 2 cases.
+        (a) If the SwapCache is newly allocated and read, it has no charges.
+        (b) If the SwapCache has been mapped by processes, it has been
+            charged already.
+        This swap-in is one of the most complicated work. In do_swap_page(),
+        following events occur when pte is unchanged.
+        (1) the page (SwapCache) is looked up.
+        (2) lock_page()
+        (3) try_charge_swapin()
+        (4) reuse_swap_page() (may call delete_swap_cache())
+        (5) commit_charge_swapin()
+        (6) swap_free().
+        Considering following situation for example.
+        (A) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page()
+            doesn't call delete_from_swap_cache().
+        (B) The page has not been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page()
+            calls delete_from_swap_cache().
+        (C) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() doesn't
+            call delete_from_swap_cache().
+        (D) The page has been charged before (2) and reuse_swap_page() calls
+            delete_from_swap_cache().
+            memory.usage/memsw.usage changes to this page/swp_entry will be
+         Case          (A)      (B)       (C)     (D)
+         Event
+       Before (2)     0/ 1     0/ 1      1/ 1    1/ 1
+          ===========================================
+          (3)        +1/+1    +1/+1     +1/+1   +1/+1
+          (4)          -       0/ 0       -     -1/ 0
+          (5)         0/-1     0/ 0     -1/-1    0/ 0
+          (6)          -       0/-1       -      0/-1
+          ===========================================
+       Result         1/ 1     1/ 1      1/ 1    1/ 1
+       In any cases, charges to this page should be 1/ 1.
+        4.2 Swap-out.
+        At swap-out, typical state transition is below.
+        (a) add to swap cache. (marked as SwapCache)
+            swp_entry's refcnt += 1.
+        (b) fully unmapped.
+            swp_entry's refcnt += # of ptes.
+        (c) write back to swap.
+        (d) delete from swap cache. (remove from SwapCache)
+            swp_entry's refcnt -= 1.
+        At (b), the page is marked as SwapCache and not uncharged.
+        At (d), the page is removed from SwapCache and a charge in page_cgroup
+        is moved to swap_cgroup.
+        Finally, at task exit,
+        (e) zap_pte() is called and swp_entry's refcnt -=1 -> 0.
+        Here, a charge in swap_cgroup disappears.
+5. Page Cache
+        Page Cache is charged at
+        - add_to_page_cache_locked().
+        uncharged at
+        - __remove_from_page_cache().
+        The logic is very clear. (About migration, see below)
+        Note: __remove_from_page_cache() is called by remove_from_page_cache()
+        and __remove_mapping().
+6. Shmem(tmpfs) Page Cache
+        Memcg's charge/uncharge have special handlers of shmem. The best way
+        to understand shmem's page state transition is to read mm/shmem.c.
+        But brief explanation of the behavior of memcg around shmem will be
+        helpful to understand the logic.
+        Shmem's page (just leaf page, not direct/indirect block) can be on
+                - radix-tree of shmem's inode.
+                - SwapCache.
+                - Both on radix-tree and SwapCache. This happens at swap-in
+                  and swap-out,
+        It's charged when...
+        - A new page is added to shmem's radix-tree.
+        - A swp page is read. (move a charge from swap_cgroup to page_cgroup)
+        It's uncharged when
+        - A page is removed from radix-tree and not SwapCache.
+        - When SwapCache is removed, a charge is moved to swap_cgroup.
+        - When swp_entry's refcnt goes down to 0, a charge in swap_cgroup
+          disappears.
+7. Page Migration
+        One of the most complicated functions is page-migration-handler.
+        Memcg has 2 routines. Assume that we are migrating a page's contents
+        from OLDPAGE to NEWPAGE.
+        Usual migration logic is..
+        (a) remove the page from LRU.
+        (b) allocate NEWPAGE (migration target)
+        (c) lock by lock_page().
+        (d) unmap all mappings.
+        (e-1) If necessary, replace entry in radix-tree.
+        (e-2) move contents of a page.
+        (f) map all mappings again.
+        (g) pushback the page to LRU.
+        (-) OLDPAGE will be freed.
+        Before (g), memcg should complete all necessary charge/uncharge to
+        NEWPAGE/OLDPAGE.
+        The point is....
+        - If OLDPAGE is anonymous, all charges will be dropped at (d) because
+          try_to_unmap() drops all mapcount and the page will not be
+          SwapCache.
+        - If OLDPAGE is SwapCache, charges will be kept at (g) because
+          __delete_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1)
+        - If OLDPAGE is page-cache, charges will be kept at (g) because
+          remove_from_swap_cache() isn't called at (e-1)
+        memcg provides following hooks.
+        - mem_cgroup_prepare_migration(OLDPAGE)
+          Called after (b) to account a charge (usage += PAGE_SIZE) against
+          memcg which OLDPAGE belongs to.
+        - mem_cgroup_end_migration(OLDPAGE, NEWPAGE)
+          Called after (f) before (g).
+          If OLDPAGE is used, commit OLDPAGE again. If OLDPAGE is already
+          charged, a charge by prepare_migration() is automatically canceled.
+          If NEWPAGE is used, commit NEWPAGE and uncharge OLDPAGE.
+          But zap_pte() (by exit or munmap) can be called while migration,
+          we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit().
+8. LRU
+        Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, it's handling is under global
+        VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock).
+        Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
+        list management functions under zone->lru_lock().
+        A special function is mem_cgroup_isolate_pages(). This scans
+        memcg's private LRU and call __isolate_lru_page() to extract a page
+        from LRU.
+        (By __isolate_lru_page(), the page is removed from both of global and
+         private LRU.)
+9. Typical Tests.
+ Tests for racy cases.
+ 9.1 Small limit to memcg.
+        When you do test to do racy case, it's good test to set memcg's limit
+        to be very small rather than GB. Many races found in the test under
+        xKB or xxMB limits.
+        (Memory behavior under GB and Memory behavior under MB shows very
+         different situation.)
+ 9.2 Shmem
+        Historically, memcg's shmem handling was poor and we saw some amount
+        of troubles here. This is because shmem is page-cache but can be
+        SwapCache. Test with shmem/tmpfs is always good test.
+ 9.3 Migration
+        For NUMA, migration is an another special case. To do easy test, cpuset
+        is useful. Following is a sample script to do migration.
+        mount -t cgroup -o cpuset none /opt/cpuset
+        mkdir /opt/cpuset/01
+        echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.cpus
+        echo 0 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.mems
+        echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/01/cpuset.memory_migrate
+        mkdir /opt/cpuset/02
+        echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.cpus
+        echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.mems
+        echo 1 > /opt/cpuset/02/cpuset.memory_migrate
+        In above set, when you moves a task from 01 to 02, page migration to
+        node 0 to node 1 will occur. Following is a script to migrate all
+        under cpuset.
+        --
+        move_task()
+        {
+        for pid in $1
+        do
+                /bin/echo $pid >$2/tasks 2>/dev/null
+                echo -n $pid
+                echo -n " "
+        done
+        echo END
+        }
+        G1_TASK=`cat ${G1}/tasks`
+        G2_TASK=`cat ${G2}/tasks`
+        move_task "${G1_TASK}" ${G2} &
+        --
+ 9.4 Memory hotplug.
+        memory hotplug test is one of good test.
+        to offline memory, do following.
+        # echo offline > /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+        (XXX is the place of memory)
+        This is an easy way to test page migration, too.
+ 9.5 mkdir/rmdir
+        When using hierarchy, mkdir/rmdir test should be done.
+        Use tests like the following.
+        echo 1 >/opt/cgroup/01/memory/use_hierarchy
+        mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_a
+        mkdir /opt/cgroup/01/child_b
+        set limit to 01.
+        add limit to 01/child_b
+        run jobs under child_a and child_b
+        create/delete following groups at random while jobs are running.
+        /opt/cgroup/01/child_a/child_aa
+        /opt/cgroup/01/child_b/child_bb
+        /opt/cgroup/01/child_c
+        running new jobs in new group is also good.
+ 9.6 Mount with other subsystems.
+        Mounting with other subsystems is a good test because there is a
+        race and lock dependency with other cgroup subsystems.
+        example)
+        # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
+        and do task move, mkdir, rmdir etc...under this.
+ 9.7 swapoff.
+        Besides management of swap is one of complicated parts of memcg,
+        call path of swap-in at swapoff is not same as usual swap-in path..
+        It's worth to be tested explicitly.
+        For example, test like following is good.
+        (Shell-A)
+        # mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t memory
+        # mkdir /cgroup/test
+        # echo 40M > /cgroup/test/memory.limit_in_bytes
+        # echo 0 > /cgroup/test/tasks
+        Run malloc(100M) program under this. You'll see 60M of swaps.
+        (Shell-B)
+        # move all tasks in /cgroup/test to /cgroup
+        # /sbin/swapoff -a
+        # rmdir /test/cgroup
+        # kill malloc task.
+        Of course, tmpfs v.s. swapoff test should be tested, too.
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index 1c07547d3f81..e1501964df1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -137,7 +137,32 @@ behind this approach is that a cgroup that aggressively uses a shared
 page will eventually get charged for it (once it is uncharged from
 the cgroup that brought it in -- this will happen on memory pressure).
-2.4 Reclaim
+Exception: If CONFIG_CGROUP_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP is not used..
+When you do swapoff and make swapped-out pages of shmem(tmpfs) to
+be backed into memory in force, charges for pages are accounted against the
+caller of swapoff rather than the users of shmem.
+2.4 Swap Extension (CONFIG_CGROUP_MEM_RES_CTLR_SWAP)
+Swap Extension allows you to record charge for swap. A swapped-in page is
+charged back to original page allocator if possible.
+When swap is accounted, following files are added.
+ - memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes.
+ - memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes.
+usage of mem+swap is limited by memsw.limit_in_bytes.
+Note: why 'mem+swap' rather than swap.
+The global LRU(kswapd) can swap out arbitrary pages. Swap-out means
+to move account from memory to swap...there is no change in usage of
+mem+swap.
+In other words, when we want to limit the usage of swap without affecting
+global LRU, mem+swap limit is better than just limiting swap from OS point
+of view.
+2.5 Reclaim
 Each cgroup maintains a per cgroup LRU that consists of an active
 and inactive list. When a cgroup goes over its limit, we first try
@@ -207,12 +232,6 @@ exceeded.
 The memory.stat file gives accounting information. Now, the number of
 caches, RSS and Active pages/Inactive pages are shown.
-The memory.force_empty gives an interface to drop *all* charges by force.
-# echo 1 > memory.force_empty
-will drop all charges in cgroup. Currently, this is maintained for test.
 4. Testing
 Balbir posted lmbench, AIM9, LTP and vmmstress results [10] and [11].
@@ -242,10 +261,106 @@ reclaimed.
 A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a
 cgroup might have some charge associated with it, even though all
-tasks have migrated away from it. Such charges are automatically dropped at
+tasks have migrated away from it.
-rmdir() if there are no tasks.
+Such charges are freed(at default) or moved to its parent. When moved,
+both of RSS and CACHES are moved to parent.
+If both of them are busy, rmdir() returns -EBUSY. See 5.1 Also.
+Charges recorded in swap information is not updated at removal of cgroup.
+Recorded information is discarded and a cgroup which uses swap (swapcache)
+will be charged as a new owner of it.
+5. Misc. interfaces.
+5.1 force_empty
+  memory.force_empty interface is provided to make cgroup's memory usage empty.
+  You can use this interface only when the cgroup has no tasks.
+  When writing anything to this
+  # echo 0 > memory.force_empty
+  Almost all pages tracked by this memcg will be unmapped and freed. Some of
+  pages cannot be freed because it's locked or in-use. Such pages are moved
+  to parent and this cgroup will be empty. But this may return -EBUSY in
+  some too busy case.
+  Typical use case of this interface is that calling this before rmdir().
+  Because rmdir() moves all pages to parent, some out-of-use page caches can be
+  moved to the parent. If you want to avoid that, force_empty will be useful.
+5.2 stat file
+  memory.stat file includes following statistics (now)
+        cache                   - # of pages from page-cache and shmem.
+        rss                     - # of pages from anonymous memory.
+        pgpgin                  - # of event of charging
+        pgpgout                 - # of event of uncharging
+        active_anon             - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem.
+        inactive_anon           - # of pages on active lru of anon, shmem
+        active_file             - # of pages on active lru of file-cache
+        inactive_file           - # of pages on inactive lru of file cache
+        unevictable             - # of pages cannot be reclaimed.(mlocked etc)
+        Below is depend on CONFIG_DEBUG_VM.
+        inactive_ratio          - VM inernal parameter. (see mm/page_alloc.c)
+        recent_rotated_anon     - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+        recent_rotated_file     - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+        recent_scanned_anon     - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+        recent_scanned_file     - VM internal parameter. (see mm/vmscan.c)
+  Memo:
+        recent_rotated means recent frequency of lru rotation.
+        recent_scanned means recent # of scans to lru.
+        showing for better debug please see the code for meanings.
+5.3 swappiness
+  Similar to /proc/sys/vm/swappiness, but affecting a hierarchy of groups only.
+  Following cgroup's swapiness can't be changed.
+  - root cgroup (uses /proc/sys/vm/swappiness).
+  - a cgroup which uses hierarchy and it has child cgroup.
+  - a cgroup which uses hierarchy and not the root of hierarchy.
+6. Hierarchy support
+The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting.
+The hierarchy is created by creating the appropriate cgroups in the
+cgroup filesystem. Consider for example, the following cgroup filesystem
+hierarchy
+                root
+             /  |   \
+           /    |    \
+          a     b       c
+                        | \
+                        |  \
+                        d   e
+In the diagram above, with hierarchical accounting enabled, all memory
+usage of e, is accounted to its ancestors up until the root (i.e, c and root),
+that has memory.use_hierarchy enabled.  If one of the ancestors goes over its
+limit, the reclaim algorithm reclaims from the tasks in the ancestor and the
+children of the ancestor.
+6.1 Enabling hierarchical accounting and reclaim
+The memory controller by default disables the hierarchy feature. Support
+can be enabled by writing 1 to memory.use_hierarchy file of the root cgroup
+# echo 1 > memory.use_hierarchy
+The feature can be disabled by
+# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy
+NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other
+cgroups created below it.
+NOTE2: This feature can be enabled/disabled per subtree.
-5. TODO
+7. TODO
 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/resource_counter.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt
index f196ac1d7d25..f196ac1d7d25 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/resource_counter.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
index 94bbc27ddd4f..9d620c153b04 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt
@@ -50,16 +50,17 @@ additional_cpus=n (*)	Use this to limit hotpluggable cpus. This option sets
                        cpu_possible_map = cpu_present_map + additional_cpus
 (*) Option valid only for following architectures
- x86_64, ia64
+- ia64
-ia64 and x86_64 use the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT
+ia64 uses the number of disabled local apics in ACPI tables MADT to
-to determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation
+determine the number of potentially hot-pluggable cpus. The implementation
-should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely on the
+should only rely on this to count the # of cpus, but *MUST* not rely
-apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event BIOS doesn't
+on the apicid values in those tables for disabled apics. In the event
-mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could use this
+BIOS doesn't mark such hot-pluggable cpus as disabled entries, one could
-parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the cpu_possible_map.
+use this parameter "additional_cpus=x" to represent those cpus in the
+cpu_possible_map.
-possible_cpus=n         [s390 only] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
+possible_cpus=n         [s390,x86_64] use this to set hotpluggable cpus.
                        This option sets possible_cpus bits in
                        cpu_possible_map. Thus keeping the numbers of bits set
                        constant even if the machine gets rebooted.
diff --git a/Documentation/cputopology.txt b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
index bd699da24666..45932ec21cee 100644
--- a/Documentation/cputopology.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cputopology.txt
@@ -31,3 +31,51 @@ not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h:
 2) core_id: 0
 3) thread_siblings: just the given CPU
 4) core_siblings: just the given CPU
+Additionally, cpu topology information is provided under
+/sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files.  The internal
+source for the output is in brackets ("[]").
+    kernel_max: the maximum cpu index allowed by the kernel configuration.
+                [NR_CPUS-1]
+    offline:    cpus that are not online because they have been
+                HOTPLUGGED off (see cpu-hotplug.txt) or exceed the limit
+                of cpus allowed by the kernel configuration (kernel_max
+                above). [~cpu_online_mask + cpus >= NR_CPUS]
+    online:     cpus that are online and being scheduled [cpu_online_mask]
+    possible:   cpus that have been allocated resources and can be
+                brought online if they are present. [cpu_possible_mask]
+    present:    cpus that have been identified as being present in the
+                system. [cpu_present_mask]
+The format for the above output is compatible with cpulist_parse()
+[see <linux/cpumask.h>].  Some examples follow.
+In this example, there are 64 cpus in the system but cpus 32-63 exceed
+the kernel max which is limited to 0..31 by the NR_CPUS config option
+being 32.  Note also that cpus 2 and 4-31 are not online but could be
+brought online as they are both present and possible.
+     kernel_max: 31
+        offline: 2,4-31,32-63
+         online: 0-1,3
+       possible: 0-31
+        present: 0-31
+In this example, the NR_CPUS config option is 128, but the kernel was
+started with possible_cpus=144.  There are 4 cpus in the system and cpu2
+was manually taken offline (and is the only cpu that can be brought
+online.)
+     kernel_max: 127
+        offline: 2,4-127,128-143
+         online: 0-1,3
+       possible: 0-127
+        present: 0-3
+See cpu-hotplug.txt for the possible_cpus=NUM kernel start parameter
+as well as more information on the various cpumask's.
diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
index c1e9545c59bd..9f59fcbf5d82 100644
--- a/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@
 3.6 Constraints
 3.7 Example
-4 DRIVER DEVELOPER NOTES
+4 DMAENGINE DRIVER DEVELOPER NOTES
 4.1 Conformance points
-4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
+4.2 "My application needs exclusive control of hardware channels"
 5 SOURCE
@@ -150,6 +150,7 @@ ops_run_* and ops_complete_* routines in drivers/md/raid5.c for more
 implementation examples.
 4 DRIVER DEVELOPMENT NOTES
 4.1 Conformance points:
 There are a few conformance points required in dmaengine drivers to
 accommodate assumptions made by applications using the async_tx API:
@@ -158,58 +159,49 @@ accommodate assumptions made by applications using the async_tx API:
 3/ Use async_tx_run_dependencies() in the descriptor clean up path to
   handle submission of dependent operations
-4.2 "My application needs finer control of hardware channels"
+4.2 "My application needs exclusive control of hardware channels"
-This requirement seems to arise from cases where a DMA engine driver is
+Primarily this requirement arises from cases where a DMA engine driver
-trying to support device-to-memory DMA.  The dmaengine and async_tx
+is being used to support device-to-memory operations.  A channel that is
-implementations were designed for offloading memory-to-memory
+performing these operations cannot, for many platform specific reasons,
-operations; however, there are some capabilities of the dmaengine layer
+be shared.  For these cases the dma_request_channel() interface is
-that can be used for platform-specific channel management.
+provided.
-Platform-specific constraints can be handled by registering the
-application as a 'dma_client' and implementing a 'dma_event_callback' to
+The interface is:
-apply a filter to the available channels in the system.  Before showing
+struct dma_chan *dma_request_channel(dma_cap_mask_t mask,
-how to implement a custom dma_event callback some background of
+                                     dma_filter_fn filter_fn,
-dmaengine's client support is required.
+                                     void *filter_param);
-The following routines in dmaengine support multiple clients requesting
+Where dma_filter_fn is defined as:
-use of a channel:
+typedef bool (*dma_filter_fn)(struct dma_chan *chan, void *filter_param);
- dma_async_client_register(struct dma_client *client)
- dma_async_client_chan_request(struct dma_client *client)
+When the optional 'filter_fn' parameter is set to NULL
+dma_request_channel simply returns the first channel that satisfies the
-dma_async_client_register takes a pointer to an initialized dma_client
+capability mask.  Otherwise, when the mask parameter is insufficient for
-structure.  It expects that the 'event_callback' and 'cap_mask' fields
+specifying the necessary channel, the filter_fn routine can be used to
-are already initialized.
+disposition the available channels in the system. The filter_fn routine
+is called once for each free channel in the system.  Upon seeing a
-dma_async_client_chan_request triggers dmaengine to notify the client of
+suitable channel filter_fn returns DMA_ACK which flags that channel to
-all channels that satisfy the capability mask.  It is up to the client's
+be the return value from dma_request_channel.  A channel allocated via
-event_callback routine to track how many channels the client needs and
+this interface is exclusive to the caller, until dma_release_channel()
-how many it is currently using.  The dma_event_callback routine returns a
+is called.
-dma_state_client code to let dmaengine know the status of the
-allocation.
+The DMA_PRIVATE capability flag is used to tag dma devices that should
+not be used by the general-purpose allocator.  It can be set at
-Below is the example of how to extend this functionality for
+initialization time if it is known that a channel will always be
-platform-specific filtering of the available channels beyond the
+private.  Alternatively, it is set when dma_request_channel() finds an
-standard capability mask:
+unused "public" channel.
-static enum dma_state_client
+A couple caveats to note when implementing a driver and consumer:
-my_dma_client_callback(struct dma_client *client,
+1/ Once a channel has been privately allocated it will no longer be
-                        struct dma_chan *chan, enum dma_state state)
+   considered by the general-purpose allocator even after a call to
-{
+   dma_release_channel().
-        struct dma_device *dma_dev;
+2/ Since capabilities are specified at the device level a dma_device
-        struct my_platform_specific_dma *plat_dma_dev;
+   with multiple channels will either have all channels public, or all
-        
+   channels private.
-        dma_dev = chan->device;
-        plat_dma_dev = container_of(dma_dev,
-                                    struct my_platform_specific_dma,
-                                    dma_dev);
-        if (!plat_dma_dev->platform_specific_capability)
-                return DMA_DUP;
-        . . .
-}
 5 SOURCE
-include/linux/dmaengine.h: core header file for DMA drivers and clients
+include/linux/dmaengine.h: core header file for DMA drivers and api users
 drivers/dma/dmaengine.c: offload engine channel management routines
 drivers/dma/: location for offload engine drivers
 include/linux/async_tx.h: core header file for the async_tx api
diff --git a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt
index 2c0d631de0cf..c11b931f8f98 100644
--- a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt
@@ -81,8 +81,8 @@ Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded.
 Also echoing either mono ,packet or init in to image_type will free up the
 memory allocated by the driver.
-If an user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
+If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2;
-it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries to disappear.
+it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear.
 The entries can be recreated by doing the following
 echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type
 NOTE: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value.
diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding
index 014aca8f14e2..a5a3450faaa0 100644
--- a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding
+++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding
@@ -375,10 +375,10 @@ say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the
 justification is solid.
 When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible,
-ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.  
+ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler.
 This will help you to be sure that you have found all in-tree uses of that
 interface.  It will also alert developers of out-of-tree code that there is
 a change that they need to respond to.  Supporting out-of-tree code is not
 something that kernel developers need to be worried about, but we also do
-not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it it needs to
+not have to make life harder for out-of-tree developers than it needs to
-be. 
+be.
diff --git a/Documentation/dmaengine.txt b/Documentation/dmaengine.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c1c2f63c0a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/dmaengine.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+See Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index a0ed3964a219..5ddbe350487a 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -310,15 +310,6 @@ Who:  Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl>
 ---------------------------
-What: ide-scsi (BLK_DEV_IDESCSI)
-When: 2.6.29
-Why:  The 2.6 kernel supports direct writing to ide CD drives, which
-      eliminates the need for ide-scsi. The new method is more
-      efficient in every way.
-Who:  FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
---------------------------
 What:   i2c_attach_client(), i2c_detach_client(), i2c_driver->detach_client()
 When:   2.6.29 (ideally) or 2.6.30 (more likely)
 Why:    Deprecated by the new (standard) device driver binding model. Use
@@ -327,6 +318,14 @@ Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
 ---------------------------
+What:   fscher and fscpos drivers
+When:   June 2009
+Why:    Deprecated by the new fschmd driver.
+Who:    Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
+        Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
+---------------------------
 What:   SELinux "compat_net" functionality
 When:   2.6.30 at the earliest
 Why:    In 2.6.18 the Secmark concept was introduced to replace the "compat_net"
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 23d2f4460deb..ec6a9392a173 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -97,8 +97,8 @@ prototypes:
        void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
        void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
        int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
-        void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
+        int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
-        void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
+        int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
        int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
        int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
        void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
@@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ delete_inode:		no
 put_super:              yes     yes     no
 write_super:            no      yes     read
 sync_fs:                no      no      read
-write_super_lockfs:     ?
+freeze_fs:              ?
-unlockfs:               ?
+unfreeze_fs:            ?
 statfs:                 no      no      no
 remount_fs:             yes     yes     maybe           (see below)
 clear_inode:            no
@@ -394,11 +394,10 @@ prototypes:
        unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long,
                        unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
        int (*check_flags)(int);
-        int (*dir_notify)(struct file *, unsigned long);
 };
 locking rules:
-        All except ->poll() may block.
+        All may block.
                        BKL
 llseek:                 no      (see below)
 read:                   no
@@ -424,7 +423,6 @@ sendfile:		no
 sendpage:               no
 get_unmapped_area:      no
 check_flags:            no
-dir_notify:             no
 ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek
 implementations.  If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..64087c34327f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/btrfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+        BTRFS
+        =====
+Btrfs is a new copy on write filesystem for Linux aimed at
+implementing advanced features while focusing on fault tolerance,
+repair and easy administration. Initially developed by Oracle, Btrfs
+is licensed under the GPL and open for contribution from anyone.
+Linux has a wealth of filesystems to choose from, but we are facing a
+number of challenges with scaling to the large storage subsystems that
+are becoming common in today's data centers. Filesystems need to scale
+in their ability to address and manage large storage, and also in
+their ability to detect, repair and tolerate errors in the data stored
+on disk.  Btrfs is under heavy development, and is not suitable for
+any uses other than benchmarking and review. The Btrfs disk format is
+not yet finalized.
+The main Btrfs features include:
+    * Extent based file storage (2^64 max file size)
+    * Space efficient packing of small files
+    * Space efficient indexed directories
+    * Dynamic inode allocation
+    * Writable snapshots
+    * Subvolumes (separate internal filesystem roots)
+    * Object level mirroring and striping
+    * Checksums on data and metadata (multiple algorithms available)
+    * Compression
+    * Integrated multiple device support, with several raid algorithms
+    * Online filesystem check (not yet implemented)
+    * Very fast offline filesystem check
+    * Efficient incremental backup and FS mirroring (not yet implemented)
+    * Online filesystem defragmentation
+        MAILING LIST
+        ============
+There is a Btrfs mailing list hosted on vger.kernel.org. You can
+find details on how to subscribe here:
+http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-btrfs
+Mailing list archives are available from gmane:
+http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.file-systems.btrfs
+        IRC
+        ===
+Discussion of Btrfs also occurs on the #btrfs channel of the Freenode
+IRC network.
+        UTILITIES
+        =========
+Userspace tools for creating and manipulating Btrfs file systems are
+available from the git repository at the following location:
+ http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/mason/btrfs-progs-unstable.git
+ git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mason/btrfs-progs-unstable.git
+These include the following tools:
+mkfs.btrfs: create a filesystem
+btrfsctl: control program to create snapshots and subvolumes:
+        mount /dev/sda2 /mnt
+        btrfsctl -s new_subvol_name /mnt
+        btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_default /mnt/default
+        btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_new_subvol /mnt/new_subvol_name
+        btrfsctl -s snapshot_of_a_snapshot /mnt/snapshot_of_new_subvol
+        ls /mnt
+        default snapshot_of_a_snapshot snapshot_of_new_subvol
+        new_subvol_name snapshot_of_default
+        Snapshots and subvolumes cannot be deleted right now, but you can
+        rm -rf all the files and directories inside them.
+btrfsck: do a limited check of the FS extent trees.
+btrfs-debug-tree: print all of the FS metadata in text form.  Example:
+        btrfs-debug-tree /dev/sda2 >& big_output_file
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..68dffd87f9b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/devpts.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+To support containers, we now allow multiple instances of devpts filesystem,
+such that indices of ptys allocated in one instance are independent of indices
+allocated in other instances of devpts.
+To preserve backward compatibility, this support for multiple instances is
+enabled only if:
+        - CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y, and
+        - '-o newinstance' mount option is specified while mounting devpts
+IOW, devpts now supports both single-instance and multi-instance semantics.
+If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=n, there is no change in behavior and
+this referred to as the "legacy" mode. In this mode, the new mount options
+(-o newinstance and -o ptmxmode) will be ignored with a 'bogus option' message
+on console.
+If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and devpts is mounted without the
+'newinstance' option (as in current start-up scripts) the new mount binds
+to the initial kernel mount of devpts. This mode is referred to as the
+'single-instance' mode and the current, single-instance semantics are
+preserved, i.e PTYs are common across the system.
+The only difference between this single-instance mode and the legacy mode
+is the presence of new, '/dev/pts/ptmx' node with permissions 0000, which
+can safely be ignored.
+If CONFIG_DEVPTS_MULTIPLE_INSTANCES=y and 'newinstance' option is specified,
+the mount is considered to be in the multi-instance mode and a new instance
+of the devpts fs is created. Any ptys created in this instance are independent
+of ptys in other instances of devpts. Like in the single-instance mode, the
+/dev/pts/ptmx node is present. To effectively use the multi-instance mode,
+open of /dev/ptmx must be a redirected to '/dev/pts/ptmx' using a symlink or
+bind-mount.
+Eg: A container startup script could do the following:
+        $ chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx
+        $ rm /dev/ptmx
+        $ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
+        $ ns_exec -cm /bin/bash
+        # We are now in new container
+        $ umount /dev/pts
+        $ mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts
+        $ sshd -p 1234
+where 'ns_exec -cm /bin/bash' calls clone() with CLONE_NEWNS flag and execs
+/bin/bash in the child process.  A pty created by the sshd is not visible in
+the original mount of /dev/pts.
+User-space changes
+------------------
+In multi-instance mode (i.e '-o newinstance' mount option is specified at least
+once), following user-space issues should be noted.
+1. If -o newinstance mount option is never used, /dev/pts/ptmx can be ignored
+   and no change is needed to system-startup scripts.
+2. To effectively use multi-instance mode (i.e -o newinstance is specified)
+   administrators or startup scripts should "redirect" open of /dev/ptmx to
+   /dev/pts/ptmx using either a bind mount or symlink.
+        $ mount -t devpts -o newinstance devpts /dev/pts
+   followed by either
+        $ rm /dev/ptmx
+        $ ln -s pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
+        $ chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx
+   or
+        $ mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
+3. The '/dev/ptmx -> pts/ptmx' symlink is the preferred method since it
+   enables better error-reporting and treats both single-instance and
+   multi-instance mounts similarly.
+   But this method requires that system-startup scripts set the mode of
+   /dev/pts/ptmx correctly (default mode is 0000). The scripts can set the
+   mode by, either
+        - adding ptmxmode mount option to devpts entry in /etc/fstab, or
+        - using 'chmod 0666 /dev/pts/ptmx'
+4. If multi-instance mode mount is needed for containers, but the system
+   startup scripts have not yet been updated, container-startup scripts
+   should bind mount /dev/ptmx to /dev/pts/ptmx to avoid breaking single-
+   instance mounts.
+   Or, in general, container-startup scripts should use:
+        mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0666 devpts /dev/pts
+        if [ ! -L /dev/ptmx ]; then
+                mount -o bind /dev/pts/ptmx /dev/ptmx
+        fi
+   When all devpts mounts are multi-instance, /dev/ptmx can permanently be
+   a symlink to pts/ptmx and the bind mount can be ignored.
+5. A multi-instance mount that is not accompanied by the /dev/ptmx to
+   /dev/pts/ptmx redirection would result in an unusable/unreachable pty.
+        mount -t devpts -o newinstance lxcpts /dev/pts
+   immediately followed by:
+        open("/dev/ptmx")
+    would create a pty, say /dev/pts/7, in the initial kernel mount.
+    But /dev/pts/7 would be invisible in the new mount.
+6. The permissions for /dev/pts/ptmx node should be specified when mounting
+   /dev/pts, using the '-o ptmxmode=%o' mount option (default is 0000).
+        mount -t devpts -o newinstance -o ptmxmode=0644 devpts /dev/pts
+   The permissions can be later be changed as usual with 'chmod'.
+        chmod 666 /dev/pts/ptmx
+7. A mount of devpts without the 'newinstance' option results in binding to
+   initial kernel mount.  This behavior while preserving legacy semantics,
+   does not provide strict isolation in a container environment. i.e by
+   mounting devpts without the 'newinstance' option, a container could
+   get visibility into the 'host' or root container's devpts.
+   
+   To workaround this and have strict isolation, all mounts of devpts,
+   including the mount in the root container, should use the newinstance
+   option.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
index 174eaff7ded9..cec829bc7291 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt
@@ -58,13 +58,22 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
        # mount -t ext4 /dev/hda1 /wherever
-  - When comparing performance with other filesystems, remember that
+  - When comparing performance with other filesystems, it's always
-    ext3/4 by default offers higher data integrity guarantees than most.
+    important to try multiple workloads; very often a subtle change in a
-    So when comparing with a metadata-only journalling filesystem, such
+    workload parameter can completely change the ranking of which
-    as ext3, use `mount -o data=writeback'.  And you might as well use
+    filesystems do well compared to others.  When comparing versus ext3,
-    `mount -o nobh' too along with it.  Making the journal larger than
+    note that ext4 enables write barriers by default, while ext3 does
-    the mke2fs default often helps performance with metadata-intensive
+    not enable write barriers by default.  So it is useful to use
-    workloads.
+    explicitly specify whether barriers are enabled or not when via the
+    '-o barriers=[0|1]' mount option for both ext3 and ext4 filesystems
+    for a fair comparison.  When tuning ext3 for best benchmark numbers,
+    it is often worthwhile to try changing the data journaling mode; '-o
+    data=writeback,nobh' can be faster for some workloads.  (Note
+    however that running mounted with data=writeback can potentially
+    leave stale data exposed in recently written files in case of an
+    unclean shutdown, which could be a security exposure in some
+    situations.)  Configuring the filesystem with a large journal can
+    also be helpful for metadata-intensive workloads.
 2. Features
 ===========
@@ -74,7 +83,7 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be
 * ability to use filesystems > 16TB (e2fsprogs support not available yet)
 * extent format reduces metadata overhead (RAM, IO for access, transactions)
 * extent format more robust in face of on-disk corruption due to magics,
-* internal redunancy in tree
+* internal redundancy in tree
 * improved file allocation (multi-block alloc)
 * fix 32000 subdirectory limit
 * nsec timestamps for mtime, atime, ctime, create time
@@ -116,10 +125,11 @@ grouping of bitmaps and inode tables.  Some test results available here:
 When mounting an ext4 filesystem, the following option are accepted:
 (*) == default
-extents         (*)     ext4 will use extents to address file data.  The
+ro                      Mount filesystem read only. Note that ext4 will
-                        file system will no longer be mountable by ext3.
+                        replay the journal (and thus write to the
+                        partition) even when mounted "read only". The
-noextents               ext4 will not use extents for newly created files
+                        mount options "ro,noload" can be used to prevent
+                        writes to the filesystem.
 journal_checksum        Enable checksumming of the journal transactions.
                        This will allow the recovery code in e2fsck and the
@@ -134,17 +144,17 @@ journal_async_commit	Commit block can be written to disk without waiting
 journal=update          Update the ext4 file system's journal to the current
                        format.
-journal=inum            When a journal already exists, this option is ignored.
-                        Otherwise, it specifies the number of the inode which
-                        will represent the ext4 file system's journal file.
 journal_dev=devnum      When the external journal device's major/minor numbers
                        have changed, this option allows the user to specify
                        the new journal location.  The journal device is
                        identified through its new major/minor numbers encoded
                        in devnum.
-noload                  Don't load the journal on mounting.
+noload                  Don't load the journal on mounting.  Note that
+                        if the filesystem was not unmounted cleanly,
+                        skipping the journal replay will lead to the
+                        filesystem containing inconsistencies that can
+                        lead to any number of problems.
 data=journal            All data are committed into the journal prior to being
                        written into the main file system.
@@ -219,9 +229,12 @@ minixdf			Make 'df' act like Minix.
 debug                   Extra debugging information is sent to syslog.
-errors=remount-ro(*)    Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=remount-ro       Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
 errors=continue         Keep going on a filesystem error.
 errors=panic            Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
+                        (These mount options override the errors behavior
+                        specified in the superblock, which can be configured
+                        using tune2fs)
 data_err=ignore(*)      Just print an error message if an error occurs
                        in a file data buffer in ordered mode.
@@ -261,6 +274,42 @@ delalloc	(*)	Deferring block allocation until write-out time.
 nodelalloc              Disable delayed allocation. Blocks are allocation
                        when data is copied from user to page cache.
+max_batch_time=usec     Maximum amount of time ext4 should wait for
+                        additional filesystem operations to be batch
+                        together with a synchronous write operation.
+                        Since a synchronous write operation is going to
+                        force a commit and then a wait for the I/O
+                        complete, it doesn't cost much, and can be a
+                        huge throughput win, we wait for a small amount
+                        of time to see if any other transactions can
+                        piggyback on the synchronous write.   The
+                        algorithm used is designed to automatically tune
+                        for the speed of the disk, by measuring the
+                        amount of time (on average) that it takes to
+                        finish committing a transaction.  Call this time
+                        the "commit time".  If the time that the
+                        transactoin has been running is less than the
+                        commit time, ext4 will try sleeping for the
+                        commit time to see if other operations will join
+                        the transaction.   The commit time is capped by
+                        the max_batch_time, which defaults to 15000us
+                        (15ms).   This optimization can be turned off
+                        entirely by setting max_batch_time to 0.
+min_batch_time=usec     This parameter sets the commit time (as
+                        described above) to be at least min_batch_time.
+                        It defaults to zero microseconds.  Increasing
+                        this parameter may improve the throughput of
+                        multi-threaded, synchronous workloads on very
+                        fast disks, at the cost of increasing latency.
+journal_ioprio=prio     The I/O priority (from 0 to 7, where 0 is the
+                        highest priorty) which should be used for I/O
+                        operations submitted by kjournald2 during a
+                        commit operation.  This defaults to 3, which is
+                        a slightly higher priority than the default I/O
+                        priority.
 Data Mode
 =========
 There are 3 different data modes:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
index bb0142f61084..ac2facc50d2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/files.txt
@@ -76,13 +76,13 @@ the fdtable structure -
 5. Handling of the file structures is special. Since the look-up
   of the fd (fget()/fget_light()) are lock-free, it is possible
   that look-up may race with the last put() operation on the
-   file structure. This is avoided using atomic_inc_not_zero()
+   file structure. This is avoided using atomic_long_inc_not_zero()
   on ->f_count :
        rcu_read_lock();
        file = fcheck_files(files, fd);
        if (file) {
-                if (atomic_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count))
+                if (atomic_long_inc_not_zero(&file->f_count))
                        *fput_needed = 1;
                else
                /* Didn't get the reference, someone's freed */
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ the fdtable structure -
        ....
        return file;
-   atomic_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or
+   atomic_long_inc_not_zero() detects if refcounts is already zero or
   goes to zero during increment. If it does, we fail
   fget()/fget_light().
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
index 44bd766f2e5d..85eaeaddd27c 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
@@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
    Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport:
-    $ echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
+    $ echo rdma 20049 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
  - On the client system
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
    Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), use this
    command to mount the NFS/RDMA server:
-    $ mount -o rdma,port=2050 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt
+    $ mount -o rdma,port=20049 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt
    To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check
    the "proto" field for the given mount.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
index 67310fbbb7df..c2a0871280a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,6 @@ Features which OCFS2 does not support yet:
        - quotas
        - Directory change notification (F_NOTIFY)
        - Distributed Caching (F_SETLEASE/F_GETLEASE/break_lease)
-        - POSIX ACLs
 Mount options
 =============
@@ -79,3 +78,5 @@ inode64			Indicates that Ocfs2 is allowed to create inodes at
                        bits of significance.
 user_xattr      (*)     Enables Extended User Attributes.
 nouser_xattr            Disables Extended User Attributes.
+acl                     Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
+noacl           (*)     Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 71df353e367c..a87be42f8211 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -140,6 +140,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc
 statm          Process memory status information
 status         Process status in human readable form
 wchan          If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan
+ stack          Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE
 smaps          Extension based on maps, the rss size for each mapped file
 ..............................................................................
@@ -1370,268 +1371,8 @@ auto_msgmni default value is 1.
 2.4 /proc/sys/vm - The virtual memory subsystem
 -----------------------------------------------
-The files  in  this directory can be used to tune the operation of the virtual
+Please see: Documentation/sysctls/vm.txt for a description of these
-memory (VM)  subsystem  of  the  Linux  kernel.
+entries.
-vfs_cache_pressure
------------------
-Controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim the memory which is used for
-caching of directory and inode objects.
-At the default value of vfs_cache_pressure=100 the kernel will attempt to
-reclaim dentries and inodes at a "fair" rate with respect to pagecache and
-swapcache reclaim.  Decreasing vfs_cache_pressure causes the kernel to prefer
-to retain dentry and inode caches.  Increasing vfs_cache_pressure beyond 100
-causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes.
-dirty_background_ratio
----------------------
-Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
-pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
-pages at which the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out
-dirty data.
-dirty_ratio
-----------------
-Contains, as a percentage of the dirtyable system memory (free pages + mapped
-pages + file cache, not including locked pages and HugePages), the number of
-pages at which a process which is generating disk writes will itself start
-writing out dirty data.
-dirty_writeback_centisecs
-------------------------
-The pdflush writeback daemons will periodically wake up and write `old' data
-out to disk.  This tunable expresses the interval between those wakeups, in
-100'ths of a second.
-Setting this to zero disables periodic writeback altogether.
-dirty_expire_centisecs
----------------------
-This tunable is used to define when dirty data is old enough to be eligible
-for writeout by the pdflush daemons.  It is expressed in 100'ths of a second. 
-Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this interval will be
-written out next time a pdflush daemon wakes up.
-highmem_is_dirtyable
--------------------
-Only present if CONFIG_HIGHMEM is set.
-This defaults to 0 (false), meaning that the ratios set above are calculated
-as a percentage of lowmem only.  This protects against excessive scanning
-in page reclaim, swapping and general VM distress.
-Setting this to 1 can be useful on 32 bit machines where you want to make
-random changes within an MMAPed file that is larger than your available
-lowmem without causing large quantities of random IO.  Is is safe if the
-behavior of all programs running on the machine is known and memory will
-not be otherwise stressed.
-legacy_va_layout
----------------
-If non-zero, this sysctl disables the new 32-bit mmap mmap layout - the kernel
-will use the legacy (2.4) layout for all processes.
-lowmem_reserve_ratio
---------------------
-For some specialised workloads on highmem machines it is dangerous for
-the kernel to allow process memory to be allocated from the "lowmem"
-zone.  This is because that memory could then be pinned via the mlock()
-system call, or by unavailability of swapspace.
-And on large highmem machines this lack of reclaimable lowmem memory
-can be fatal.
-So the Linux page allocator has a mechanism which prevents allocations
-which _could_ use highmem from using too much lowmem.  This means that
-a certain amount of lowmem is defended from the possibility of being
-captured into pinned user memory.
-(The same argument applies to the old 16 megabyte ISA DMA region.  This
-mechanism will also defend that region from allocations which could use
-highmem or lowmem).
-The `lowmem_reserve_ratio' tunable determines how aggressive the kernel is
-in defending these lower zones.
-If you have a machine which uses highmem or ISA DMA and your
-applications are using mlock(), or if you are running with no swap then
-you probably should change the lowmem_reserve_ratio setting.
-The lowmem_reserve_ratio is an array. You can see them by reading this file.
-
-% cat /proc/sys/vm/lowmem_reserve_ratio
-256     256     32
-
-Note: # of this elements is one fewer than number of zones. Because the highest
-      zone's value is not necessary for following calculation.
-But, these values are not used directly. The kernel calculates # of protection
-pages for each zones from them. These are shown as array of protection pages
-in /proc/zoneinfo like followings. (This is an example of x86-64 box).
-Each zone has an array of protection pages like this.
-
-Node 0, zone      DMA
-  pages free     1355
-        min      3
-        low      3
-        high     4
-        :
-        :
-    numa_other   0
-        protection: (0, 2004, 2004, 2004)
-        ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
-  pagesets
-    cpu: 0 pcp: 0
-        :
-
-These protections are added to score to judge whether this zone should be used
-for page allocation or should be reclaimed.
-In this example, if normal pages (index=2) are required to this DMA zone and
-pages_high is used for watermark, the kernel judges this zone should not be
-used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
-(4 + 2004 = 2008). If this protection value is 0, this zone would be used for
-normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
-(=0) is used.
-zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
-(i < j):
-  zone[i]->protection[j]
-  = (total sums of present_pages from zone[i+1] to zone[j] on the node)
-    / lowmem_reserve_ratio[i];
-(i = j):
-   (should not be protected. = 0;
-(i > j):
-   (not necessary, but looks 0)
-The default values of lowmem_reserve_ratio[i] are
-    256 (if zone[i] means DMA or DMA32 zone)
-    32  (others).
-As above expression, they are reciprocal number of ratio.
-256 means 1/256. # of protection pages becomes about "0.39%" of total present
-pages of higher zones on the node.
-If you would like to protect more pages, smaller values are effective.
-The minimum value is 1 (1/1 -> 100%).
-page-cluster
------------
-page-cluster controls the number of pages which are written to swap in
-a single attempt.  The swap I/O size.
-It is a logarithmic value - setting it to zero means "1 page", setting
-it to 1 means "2 pages", setting it to 2 means "4 pages", etc.
-The default value is three (eight pages at a time).  There may be some
-small benefits in tuning this to a different value if your workload is
-swap-intensive.
-overcommit_memory
-----------------
-Controls overcommit of system memory, possibly allowing processes
-to allocate (but not use) more memory than is actually available.
-0       -       Heuristic overcommit handling. Obvious overcommits of
-                address space are refused. Used for a typical system. It
-                ensures a seriously wild allocation fails while allowing
-                overcommit to reduce swap usage.  root is allowed to
-                allocate slightly more memory in this mode. This is the
-                default.
-1       -       Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific
-                applications.
-2       -       Don't overcommit. The total address space commit
-                for the system is not permitted to exceed swap plus a
-                configurable percentage (default is 50) of physical RAM.
-                Depending on the percentage you use, in most situations
-                this means a process will not be killed while attempting
-                to use already-allocated memory but will receive errors
-                on memory allocation as appropriate.
-overcommit_ratio
----------------
-Percentage of physical memory size to include in overcommit calculations
-(see above.)
-Memory allocation limit = swapspace + physmem * (overcommit_ratio / 100)
-        swapspace = total size of all swap areas
-        physmem = size of physical memory in system
-nr_hugepages and hugetlb_shm_group
----------------------------------
-nr_hugepages configures number of hugetlb page reserved for the system.
-hugetlb_shm_group contains group id that is allowed to create SysV shared
-memory segment using hugetlb page.
-hugepages_treat_as_movable
--------------------------
-This parameter is only useful when kernelcore= is specified at boot time to
-create ZONE_MOVABLE for pages that may be reclaimed or migrated. Huge pages
-are not movable so are not normally allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. A non-zero
-value written to hugepages_treat_as_movable allows huge pages to be allocated
-from ZONE_MOVABLE.
-Once enabled, the ZONE_MOVABLE is treated as an area of memory the huge
-pages pool can easily grow or shrink within. Assuming that applications are
-not running that mlock() a lot of memory, it is likely the huge pages pool
-can grow to the size of ZONE_MOVABLE by repeatedly entering the desired value
-into nr_hugepages and triggering page reclaim.
-laptop_mode
-----------
-laptop_mode is a knob that controls "laptop mode". All the things that are
-controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
-block_dump
----------
-block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
-information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
-swap_token_timeout
------------------
-This file contains valid hold time of swap out protection token. The Linux
-VM has token based thrashing control mechanism and uses the token to prevent
-unnecessary page faults in thrashing situation. The unit of the value is
-second. The value would be useful to tune thrashing behavior.
-drop_caches
-----------
-Writing to this will cause the kernel to drop clean caches, dentries and
-inodes from memory, causing that memory to become free.
-To free pagecache:
-        echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-To free dentries and inodes:
-        echo 2 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-To free pagecache, dentries and inodes:
-        echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-As this is a non-destructive operation and dirty objects are not freeable, the
-user should run `sync' first.
 2.5 /proc/sys/dev - Device specific parameters
@@ -2286,6 +2027,34 @@ increase the likelihood of this process being killed by the oom-killer.  Valid
 values are in the range -16 to +15, plus the special value -17, which disables
 oom-killing altogether for this process.
+The process to be killed in an out-of-memory situation is selected among all others
+based on its badness score. This value equals the original memory size of the process
+and is then updated according to its CPU time (utime + stime) and the
+run time (uptime - start time). The longer it runs the smaller is the score.
+Badness score is divided by the square root of the CPU time and then by
+the double square root of the run time.
+Swapped out tasks are killed first. Half of each child's memory size is added to
+the parent's score if they do not share the same memory. Thus forking servers
+are the prime candidates to be killed. Having only one 'hungry' child will make
+parent less preferable than the child.
+/proc/<pid>/oom_score shows process' current badness score.
+The following heuristics are then applied:
+ * if the task was reniced, its score doubles
+ * superuser or direct hardware access tasks (CAP_SYS_ADMIN, CAP_SYS_RESOURCE
+        or CAP_SYS_RAWIO) have their score divided by 4
+ * if oom condition happened in one cpuset and checked task does not belong
+        to it, its score is divided by 8
+ * the resulting score is multiplied by two to the power of oom_adj, i.e.
+        points <<= oom_adj when it is positive and
+        points >>= -(oom_adj) otherwise
+The task with the highest badness score is then selected and its children
+are killed, process itself will be killed in an OOM situation when it does
+not have children or some of them disabled oom like described above.
 2.13 /proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score
 -------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3e79e4a7a392
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+SQUASHFS 4.0 FILESYSTEM
+=======================
+Squashfs is a compressed read-only filesystem for Linux.
+It uses zlib compression to compress files, inodes and directories.
+Inodes in the system are very small and all blocks are packed to minimise
+data overhead. Block sizes greater than 4K are supported up to a maximum
+of 1Mbytes (default block size 128K).
+Squashfs is intended for general read-only filesystem use, for archival
+use (i.e. in cases where a .tar.gz file may be used), and in constrained
+block device/memory systems (e.g. embedded systems) where low overhead is
+needed.
+Mailing list: squashfs-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
+Web site: www.squashfs.org
+1. FILESYSTEM FEATURES
+----------------------
+Squashfs filesystem features versus Cramfs:
+                                Squashfs                Cramfs
+Max filesystem size:            2^64                    16 MiB
+Max file size:                  ~ 2 TiB                 16 MiB
+Max files:                      unlimited               unlimited
+Max directories:                unlimited               unlimited
+Max entries per directory:      unlimited               unlimited
+Max block size:                 1 MiB                   4 KiB
+Metadata compression:           yes                     no
+Directory indexes:              yes                     no
+Sparse file support:            yes                     no
+Tail-end packing (fragments):   yes                     no
+Exportable (NFS etc.):          yes                     no
+Hard link support:              yes                     no
+"." and ".." in readdir:        yes                     no
+Real inode numbers:             yes                     no
+32-bit uids/gids:               yes                     no
+File creation time:             yes                     no
+Xattr and ACL support:          no                      no
+Squashfs compresses data, inodes and directories.  In addition, inode and
+directory data are highly compacted, and packed on byte boundaries.  Each
+compressed inode is on average 8 bytes in length (the exact length varies on
+file type, i.e. regular file, directory, symbolic link, and block/char device
+inodes have different sizes).
+2. USING SQUASHFS
+-----------------
+As squashfs is a read-only filesystem, the mksquashfs program must be used to
+create populated squashfs filesystems.  This and other squashfs utilities
+can be obtained from http://www.squashfs.org.  Usage instructions can be
+obtained from this site also.
+3. SQUASHFS FILESYSTEM DESIGN
+-----------------------------
+A squashfs filesystem consists of seven parts, packed together on a byte
+alignment:
+         ---------------
+        |  superblock   |
+        |---------------|
+        |  datablocks   |
+        |  & fragments  |
+        |---------------|
+        |  inode table  |
+        |---------------|
+        |   directory   |
+        |     table     |
+        |---------------|
+        |   fragment    |
+        |    table      |
+        |---------------|
+        |    export     |
+        |    table      |
+        |---------------|
+        |    uid/gid    |
+        |  lookup table |
+         ---------------
+Compressed data blocks are written to the filesystem as files are read from
+the source directory, and checked for duplicates.  Once all file data has been
+written the completed inode, directory, fragment, export and uid/gid lookup
+tables are written.
+3.1 Inodes
+----------
+Metadata (inodes and directories) are compressed in 8Kbyte blocks.  Each
+compressed block is prefixed by a two byte length, the top bit is set if the
+block is uncompressed.  A block will be uncompressed if the -noI option is set,
+or if the compressed block was larger than the uncompressed block.
+Inodes are packed into the metadata blocks, and are not aligned to block
+boundaries, therefore inodes overlap compressed blocks.  Inodes are identified
+by a 48-bit number which encodes the location of the compressed metadata block
+containing the inode, and the byte offset into that block where the inode is
+placed (<block, offset>).
+To maximise compression there are different inodes for each file type
+(regular file, directory, device, etc.), the inode contents and length
+varying with the type.
+To further maximise compression, two types of regular file inode and
+directory inode are defined: inodes optimised for frequently occurring
+regular files and directories, and extended types where extra
+information has to be stored.
+3.2 Directories
+---------------
+Like inodes, directories are packed into compressed metadata blocks, stored
+in a directory table.  Directories are accessed using the start address of
+the metablock containing the directory and the offset into the
+decompressed block (<block, offset>).
+Directories are organised in a slightly complex way, and are not simply
+a list of file names.  The organisation takes advantage of the
+fact that (in most cases) the inodes of the files will be in the same
+compressed metadata block, and therefore, can share the start block.
+Directories are therefore organised in a two level list, a directory
+header containing the shared start block value, and a sequence of directory
+entries, each of which share the shared start block.  A new directory header
+is written once/if the inode start block changes.  The directory
+header/directory entry list is repeated as many times as necessary.
+Directories are sorted, and can contain a directory index to speed up
+file lookup.  Directory indexes store one entry per metablock, each entry
+storing the index/filename mapping to the first directory header
+in each metadata block.  Directories are sorted in alphabetical order,
+and at lookup the index is scanned linearly looking for the first filename
+alphabetically larger than the filename being looked up.  At this point the
+location of the metadata block the filename is in has been found.
+The general idea of the index is ensure only one metadata block needs to be
+decompressed to do a lookup irrespective of the length of the directory.
+This scheme has the advantage that it doesn't require extra memory overhead
+and doesn't require much extra storage on disk.
+3.3 File data
+-------------
+Regular files consist of a sequence of contiguous compressed blocks, and/or a
+compressed fragment block (tail-end packed block).   The compressed size
+of each datablock is stored in a block list contained within the
+file inode.
+To speed up access to datablocks when reading 'large' files (256 Mbytes or
+larger), the code implements an index cache that caches the mapping from
+block index to datablock location on disk.
+The index cache allows Squashfs to handle large files (up to 1.75 TiB) while
+retaining a simple and space-efficient block list on disk.  The cache
+is split into slots, caching up to eight 224 GiB files (128 KiB blocks).
+Larger files use multiple slots, with 1.75 TiB files using all 8 slots.
+The index cache is designed to be memory efficient, and by default uses
+16 KiB.
+3.4 Fragment lookup table
+-------------------------
+Regular files can contain a fragment index which is mapped to a fragment
+location on disk and compressed size using a fragment lookup table.  This
+fragment lookup table is itself stored compressed into metadata blocks.
+A second index table is used to locate these.  This second index table for
+speed of access (and because it is small) is read at mount time and cached
+in memory.
+3.5 Uid/gid lookup table
+------------------------
+For space efficiency regular files store uid and gid indexes, which are
+converted to 32-bit uids/gids using an id look up table.  This table is
+stored compressed into metadata blocks.  A second index table is used to
+locate these.  This second index table for speed of access (and because it
+is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
+3.6 Export table
+----------------
+To enable Squashfs filesystems to be exportable (via NFS etc.) filesystems
+can optionally (disabled with the -no-exports Mksquashfs option) contain
+an inode number to inode disk location lookup table.  This is required to
+enable Squashfs to map inode numbers passed in filehandles to the inode
+location on disk, which is necessary when the export code reinstantiates
+expired/flushed inodes.
+This table is stored compressed into metadata blocks.  A second index table is
+used to locate these.  This second index table for speed of access (and because
+it is small) is read at mount time and cached in memory.
+4. TODOS AND OUTSTANDING ISSUES
+-------------------------------
+4.1 Todo list
+-------------
+Implement Xattr and ACL support.  The Squashfs 4.0 filesystem layout has hooks
+for these but the code has not been written.  Once the code has been written
+the existing layout should not require modification.
+4.2 Squashfs internal cache
+---------------------------
+Blocks in Squashfs are compressed.  To avoid repeatedly decompressing
+recently accessed data Squashfs uses two small metadata and fragment caches.
+The cache is not used for file datablocks, these are decompressed and cached in
+the page-cache in the normal way.  The cache is used to temporarily cache
+fragment and metadata blocks which have been read as a result of a metadata
+(i.e. inode or directory) or fragment access.  Because metadata and fragments
+are packed together into blocks (to gain greater compression) the read of a
+particular piece of metadata or fragment will retrieve other metadata/fragments
+which have been packed with it, these because of locality-of-reference may be
+read in the near future. Temporarily caching them ensures they are available
+for near future access without requiring an additional read and decompress.
+In the future this internal cache may be replaced with an implementation which
+uses the kernel page cache.  Because the page cache operates on page sized
+units this may introduce additional complexity in terms of locking and
+associated race conditions.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
index dd84ea3c10da..12fedb7834c6 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
@@ -79,13 +79,6 @@ Mount options
 (*) == default.
-norm_unmount (*)        commit on unmount; the journal is committed
-                        when the file-system is unmounted so that the
-                        next mount does not have to replay the journal
-                        and it becomes very fast;
-fast_unmount            do not commit on unmount; this option makes
-                        unmount faster, but the next mount slower
-                        because of the need to replay the journal.
 bulk_read               read more in one go to take advantage of flash
                        media that read faster sequentially
 no_bulk_read (*)        do not bulk-read
@@ -95,6 +88,9 @@ no_chk_data_crc		skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to
                        of this option is that corruption of the contents
                        of a file can go unnoticed.
 chk_data_crc (*)        do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes
+compr=none              override default compressor and set it to "none"
+compr=lzo               override default compressor and set it to "lzo"
+compr=zlib              override default compressor and set it to "zlib"
 Quick usage instructions
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index 5579bda58a6d..deeeed0faa8f 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -210,8 +210,8 @@ struct super_operations {
        void (*put_super) (struct super_block *);
        void (*write_super) (struct super_block *);
        int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
-        void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
+        int (*freeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
-        void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
+        int (*unfreeze_fs) (struct super_block *);
        int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
        int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
        void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
@@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ or bottom half).
        a superblock. The second parameter indicates whether the method
        should wait until the write out has been completed. Optional.
-  write_super_lockfs: called when VFS is locking a filesystem and
+  freeze_fs: called when VFS is locking a filesystem and
        forcing it into a consistent state.  This method is currently
        used by the Logical Volume Manager (LVM).
-  unlockfs: called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable
+  unfreeze_fs: called when VFS is unlocking a filesystem and making it writable
        again.
  statfs: called when the VFS needs to get filesystem statistics. This
@@ -733,7 +733,6 @@ struct file_operations {
        ssize_t (*sendpage) (struct file *, struct page *, int, size_t, loff_t *, int);
        unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long);
        int (*check_flags)(int);
-        int (*dir_notify)(struct file *filp, unsigned long arg);
        int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *);
        ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, size_t, unsigned int);
        ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int);
@@ -800,8 +799,6 @@ otherwise noted.
  check_flags: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_SETFL command
-  dir_notify: called by the fcntl(2) system call for F_NOTIFY command
  flock: called by the flock(2) system call
  splice_write: called by the VFS to splice data from a pipe to a file. This
@@ -931,7 +928,7 @@ manipulate dentries:
  d_lookup: look up a dentry given its parent and path name component
        It looks up the child of that given name from the dcache
        hash table. If it is found, the reference count is incremented
-        and the dentry is returned. The caller must use d_put()
+        and the dentry is returned. The caller must use dput()
        to free the dentry when it finishes using it.
 For further information on dentry locking, please refer to the document
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
index aef5a9b36846..d9251efdcec7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ a sensor.
 Notice that some banks have both a read and a write address this is how the
 uGuru determines if a read from or a write to the bank is taking place, thus
 when reading you should always use the read address and when writing the
-write address. The write address is always one (1) more then the read address.
+write address. The write address is always one (1) more than the read address.
 uGuru ready
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ Once all bytes have been read data will hold 0x09, but there is no reason to
 test for this. Notice that the number of bytes is bank address dependent see
 above and below.
-After completing a successfull read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
+After completing a successful read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
 ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
 if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
 algorithm described above will still work.
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ don't ask why this is the way it is.
 Once DATA holds 0x01 read CMD it should hold 0xAC now.
-After completing a successfull write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
+After completing a successful write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
 ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
 if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
 algorithm described above will still work.
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Bit 3: Beep if alarm							(RW)
 Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold     (R)
 Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold         (R)
 Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold        (R)
-Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds   (RW)
+Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds   (RW)
       Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold     (RW)
 *  This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ Byte 0:
 Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
 Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold (RW)
 Bit 3: Beep if alarm                                            (RW)
-Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds        (RW)
+Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more than 4 seconds        (RW)
 Byte 1:
 min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
index 75d13ca147cc..8ce4aa0a0f55 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7470
@@ -31,15 +31,11 @@ Each of the measured inputs (temperature, fan speed) has corresponding high/low
 limit values. The ADT7470 will signal an ALARM if any measured value exceeds
 either limit.
-The ADT7470 DOES NOT sample all inputs continuously.  A single pin on the
+The ADT7470 samples all inputs continuously.  A kernel thread is started up for
-ADT7470 is connected to a multitude of thermal diodes, but the chip must be
+the purpose of periodically querying the temperature sensors, thus allowing the
-instructed explicitly to read the multitude of diodes.  If you want to use
+automatic fan pwm control to set the fan speed.  The driver will not read the
-automatic fan control mode, you must manually read any of the temperature
+registers more often than once every 5 seconds.  Further, configuration data is
-sensors or the fan control algorithm will not run.  The chip WILL NOT DO THIS
+only read once per minute.
-AUTOMATICALLY; this must be done from userspace.  This may be a bug in the chip
-design, given that many other AD chips take care of this.  The driver will not
-read the registers more often than once every 5 seconds.  Further,
-configuration data is only read once per minute.
 Special Features
 ----------------
@@ -72,5 +68,6 @@ pwm#_auto_point2_temp.
 Notes
 -----
-As stated above, the temperature inputs must be read periodically from
+The temperature inputs no longer need to be read periodically from userspace in
-userspace in order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run.
+order for the automatic pwm algorithm to run.  This was the case for earlier
+versions of the driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a2b1abec850e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7475
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+This describes the interface for the ADT7475 driver:
+(there are 4 fans, numbered fan1 to fan4):
+fanX_input              Read the current speed of the fan (in RPMs)
+fanX_min                Read/write the minimum speed of the fan.  Dropping
+                        below this sets an alarm.
+(there are three PWMs, numbered pwm1 to pwm3):
+pwmX                    Read/write the current duty cycle of the PWM.  Writes
+                        only have effect when auto mode is turned off (see
+                        below).  Range is 0 - 255.
+pwmX_enable             Fan speed control method:
+                        0 - No control (fan at full speed)
+                        1 - Manual fan speed control (using pwm[1-*])
+                        2 - Automatic fan speed control
+pwmX_auto_channels_temp Select which channels affect this PWM
+                        1 - TEMP1 controls PWM
+                        2 - TEMP2 controls PWM
+                        4 - TEMP3 controls PWM
+                        6 - TEMP2 and TEMP3 control PWM
+                        7 - All three inputs control PWM
+pwmX_freq               Read/write the PWM frequency in Hz. The number
+                        should be one of the following:
+                        11 Hz
+                        14 Hz
+                        22 Hz
+                        29 Hz
+                        35 Hz
+                        44 Hz
+                        58 Hz
+                        88 Hz
+pwmX_auto_point1_pwm    Read/write the minimum PWM duty cycle in automatic mode
+pwmX_auto_point2_pwm    Read/write the maximum PWM duty cycle in automatic mode
+(there are three temperature settings numbered temp1 to temp3):
+tempX_input             Read the current temperature.  The value is in milli
+                        degrees of Celsius.
+tempX_max               Read/write the upper temperature limit - exceeding this
+                        will cause an alarm.
+tempX_min               Read/write the lower temperature limit - exceeding this
+                        will cause an alarm.
+tempX_offset            Read/write the temperature adjustment offset
+tempX_crit              Read/write the THERM limit for remote1.
+tempX_crit_hyst         Set the temperature value below crit where the
+                        fans will stay on - this helps drive the temperature
+                        low enough so it doesn't stay near the edge and
+                        cause THERM to keep tripping.
+tempX_auto_point1_temp  Read/write the minimum temperature where the fans will
+                        turn on in automatic mode.
+tempX_auto_point2_temp  Read/write the maximum temperature over which the fans
+                        will run in automatic mode.  tempX_auto_point1_temp
+                        and tempX_auto_point2_temp together define the
+                        range of automatic control.
+tempX_alarm             Read a 1 if the max/min alarm is set
+tempX_fault             Read a 1 if either temp1 or temp3 diode has a fault
+(There are two voltage settings, in1 and in2):
+inX_input               Read the current voltage on VCC.  Value is in
+                        millivolts.
+inX_min                 read/write the minimum voltage limit.
+                        Dropping below this causes an alarm.
+inX_max                 read/write the maximum voltage limit.
+                        Exceeding this causes an alarm.
+inX_alarm               Read a 1 if the max/min alarm is set.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a8321267b5b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+Kernel driver f71882fg
+======================
+Supported chips:
+  * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG
+    Prefix: 'f71882fg'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+  * Fintek F71862FG and F71863FG
+    Prefix: 'f71862fg'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
+  * Fintek F8000
+    Prefix: 'f8000'
+    Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
+    Datasheet: Not public
+Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
+Description
+-----------
+Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring
+capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and
+3 temperature sensors.
+These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in
+three different modes (one manual, two automatic).
+The driver assumes that no more than one chip is present, which seems
+reasonable.
+Monitoring
+----------
+The Voltage, Fan and Temperature Monitoring uses the standard sysfs
+interface as documented in sysfs-interface, without any exceptions.
+Fan Control
+-----------
+Both PWM (pulse-width modulation) and DC fan speed control methods are
+supported. The right one to use depends on external circuitry on the
+motherboard, so the driver assumes that the BIOS set the method
+properly.
+There are 2 modes to specify the speed of the fan, PWM duty cycle (or DC
+voltage) mode, where 0-100% duty cycle (0-100% of 12V) is specified. And RPM
+mode where the actual RPM of the fan (as measured) is controlled and the speed
+gets specified as 0-100% of the fan#_full_speed file.
+Since both modes work in a 0-100% (mapped to 0-255) scale, there isn't a
+whole lot of a difference when modifying fan control settings. The only
+important difference is that in RPM mode the 0-100% controls the fan speed
+between 0-100% of fan#_full_speed. It is assumed that if the BIOS programs
+RPM mode, it will also set fan#_full_speed properly, if it does not then
+fan control will not work properly, unless you set a sane fan#_full_speed
+value yourself.
+Switching between these modes requires re-initializing a whole bunch of
+registers, so the mode which the BIOS has set is kept. The mode is
+printed when loading the driver.
+Three different fan control modes are supported; the mode number is written
+to the pwm#_enable file. Note that not all modes are supported on all
+chips, and some modes may only be available in RPM / PWM mode on the F8000.
+Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error.
+* 1: Manual mode
+  You ask for a specific PWM duty cycle / DC voltage or a specific % of
+  fan#_full_speed by writing to the pwm# file. This mode is only
+  available on the F8000 if the fan channel is in RPM mode.
+* 2: Normal auto mode
+  You can define a number of temperature/fan speed trip points, which % the
+  fan should run at at this temp and which temp a fan should follow using the
+  standard sysfs interface. The number and type of trip points is chip
+  depended, see which files are available in sysfs.
+  Fan/PWM channel 3 of the F8000 is always in this mode!
+* 3: Thermostat mode (Only available on the F8000 when in duty cycle mode)
+  The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between
+  temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp.
+Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to
+fan2 and pwm3 to fan3.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index 042c0415140b..659315d98e00 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -26,6 +26,10 @@ Supported chips:
    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0.2.zip
               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0%203_(for%20C%20version).zip
+  * IT8720F
+    Prefix: 'it8720'
+    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
+    Datasheet: Not yet publicly available.
  * SiS950   [clone of IT8705F]
    Prefix: 'it87'
    Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
@@ -71,7 +75,7 @@ Description
 -----------
 This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F,
-IT8718F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips.
+IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips.
 These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports,
 joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they
@@ -84,19 +88,19 @@ the IT8716F and late IT8712F have 6. They are shared with other functions
 though, so the functionality may not be available on a given system.
 The driver dumbly assume it is there.
-The IT8718F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value is
+The IT8718F and IT8720F also features VID inputs (up to 8 pins) but the value
-stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations,
+is stored in the Super-I/O configuration space. Due to technical limitations,
 this value can currently only be read once at initialization time, so
 the driver won't notice and report changes in the VID value. The two
 upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you
 can't have both on a given board.
-The IT8716F, IT8718F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
+The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and later IT8712F revisions have support for
 2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver.
-The IT8716F and IT8718F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have optional
+The IT8716F, IT8718F and IT8720F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have
-16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more fan
+optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more
-clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
+fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and
 revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one
 of the above chips is detected.
@@ -122,7 +126,7 @@ zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage
 inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of
 0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers.
-The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F) encode the core voltage value:
+The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value:
 the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by
 the mainboard and/or processor itself. It is a value in volts.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d b/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d
index 65dfb0c0fd67..0fcfc4a7ccdc 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d
@@ -13,18 +13,21 @@ Author:
 Description
 -----------
-This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops
+This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP
-sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or
+laptops sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data
-"HP 3D DriveGuard". It detect automatically laptops with this sensor. Known models
+Protection System 3D" or "HP 3D DriveGuard". It detect automatically
-(for now the HP 2133, nc6420, nc2510, nc8510, nc84x0, nw9440 and nx9420) will
+laptops with this sensor. Known models (for now the HP 2133, nc6420,
-have their axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly
+nc2510, nc8510, nc84x0, nw9440 and nx9420) will have their axis
-play neverball).  The accelerometer data is readable via
+automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play
+neverball).  The accelerometer data is readable via
 /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d.
 Sysfs attributes under /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/:
 position - 3D position that the accelerometer reports. Format: "(x,y,z)"
-calibrate - read: values (x, y, z) that are used as the base for input class device operation.
+calibrate - read: values (x, y, z) that are used as the base for input
-            write: forces the base to be recalibrated with the current position.
+                  class device operation.
+            write: forces the base to be recalibrated with the current
+                  position.
 rate - reports the sampling rate of the accelerometer device in HZ
 This driver also provides an absolute input class device, allowing
@@ -39,11 +42,12 @@ the accelerometer are converted into a "standard" organisation of the axes
 * When the laptop is horizontal the position reported is about 0 for X and Y
 and a positive value for Z
 * If the left side is elevated, X increases (becomes positive)
- * If the front side (where the touchpad is) is elevated, Y decreases (becomes negative)
+ * If the front side (where the touchpad is) is elevated, Y decreases
+        (becomes negative)
 * If the laptop is put upside-down, Z becomes negative
-If your laptop model is not recognized (cf "dmesg"), you can send an email to the
+If your laptop model is not recognized (cf "dmesg"), you can send an
-authors to add it to the database.  When reporting a new laptop, please include
+email to the authors to add it to the database.  When reporting a new
-the output of "dmidecode" plus the value of /sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/position
+laptop, please include the output of "dmidecode" plus the value of
-in these four cases.
+/sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d/position in these four cases.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
index 2bdd3feebf53..0d240291e3cc 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm70
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
 Kernel driver lm70
 ==================
-Supported chip:
+Supported chips:
  * National Semiconductor LM70
    Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
+  * Texas Instruments TMP121/TMP123
+    Information: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp121.html
 Author:
        Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
@@ -25,6 +27,14 @@ complement digital temperature (sent via the SIO line), is available in the
 driver for interpretation. This driver makes use of the kernel's in-core
 SPI support.
+As a real (in-tree) example of this "SPI protocol driver" interfacing
+with a "SPI master controller driver", see drivers/spi/spi_lm70llp.c
+and its associated documentation.
+The TMP121/TMP123 are very similar; main differences are 4 wire SPI inter-
+face (read only) and 13-bit temperature data (0.0625 degrees celsius reso-
+lution).
 Thanks to
 ---------
 Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> for mentoring the hwmon-side driver
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
index 400620741290..a13680871bc7 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ configured individually according to the following options.
                      temperature. (PWM value from 0 to 255)
 * pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl - this flags selects for temp#_auto_temp_off temperature
-                         the bahaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
+                         the behaviour of fans. Write 1 to let fans spinning at
                         pwm#_auto_pwm_min or write 0 to let them off.
 NOTE: It has been reported that there is a bug in the LM85 that causes the flag
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bae7a3adc5d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4245
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+Kernel driver ltc4245
+=====================
+Supported chips:
+  * Linear Technology LTC4245
+    Prefix: 'ltc4245'
+    Addresses scanned: 0x20-0x3f
+    Datasheet:
+        http://www.linear.com/pc/downloadDocument.do?navId=H0,C1,C1003,C1006,C1140,P19392,D13517
+Author: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
+Description
+-----------
+The LTC4245 controller allows a board to be safely inserted and removed
+from a live backplane in multiple supply systems such as CompactPCI and
+PCI Express.
+Usage Notes
+-----------
+This driver does not probe for LTC4245 devices, due to the fact that some
+of the possible addresses are unfriendly to probing. You will need to use
+the "force" parameter to tell the driver where to find the device.
+Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4245 at address 0x23
+on I2C bus #1:
+$ modprobe ltc4245 force=1,0x23
+Sysfs entries
+-------------
+The LTC4245 has built-in limits for over and under current warnings. This
+makes it very likely that the reference circuit will be used.
+This driver uses the values in the datasheet to change the register values
+into the values specified in the sysfs-interface document. The current readings
+rely on the sense resistors listed in Table 2: "Sense Resistor Values".
+in1_input               12v input voltage (mV)
+in2_input               5v  input voltage (mV)
+in3_input               3v  input voltage (mV)
+in4_input               Vee (-12v) input voltage (mV)
+in1_min_alarm           12v input undervoltage alarm
+in2_min_alarm           5v  input undervoltage alarm
+in3_min_alarm           3v  input undervoltage alarm
+in4_min_alarm           Vee (-12v) input undervoltage alarm
+curr1_input             12v current (mA)
+curr2_input             5v  current (mA)
+curr3_input             3v  current (mA)
+curr4_input             Vee (-12v) current (mA)
+curr1_max_alarm         12v overcurrent alarm
+curr2_max_alarm         5v  overcurrent alarm
+curr3_max_alarm         3v  overcurrent alarm
+curr4_max_alarm         Vee (-12v) overcurrent alarm
+in5_input               12v output voltage (mV)
+in6_input               5v  output voltage (mV)
+in7_input               3v  output voltage (mV)
+in8_input               Vee (-12v) output voltage (mV)
+in5_min_alarm           12v output undervoltage alarm
+in6_min_alarm           5v  output undervoltage alarm
+in7_min_alarm           3v  output undervoltage alarm
+in8_min_alarm           Vee (-12v) output undervoltage alarm
+in9_input               GPIO #1 voltage data
+in10_input              GPIO #2 voltage data
+in11_input              GPIO #3 voltage data
+power1_input            12v power usage (mW)
+power2_input            5v  power usage (mW)
+power3_input            3v  power usage (mW)
+power4_input            Vee (-12v) power usage (mW)
diff --git a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
index d5885468b072..98152bcd515a 100644
--- a/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ide/warm-plug-howto.txt
@@ -11,3 +11,8 @@ unplug old device(s) and plug new device(s)
 # echo -n "1" > /sys/class/ide_port/idex/scan
 done
+NOTE: please make sure that partitions are unmounted and that there are
+no other active references to devices before doing "delete_devices" step,
+also do not attempt "scan" step on devices currently in use -- otherwise
+results may be unpredictable and lead to data loss if you're unlucky
diff --git a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8f4289efc5c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+Walkera WK-0701 transmitter is supplied with a ready to fly Walkera
+helicopters such as HM36, HM37, HM60. The walkera0701 module enables to use
+this transmitter as joystick
+Devel homepage and download:
+http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/walkera-wk0701/
+or use cogito:
+cg-clone http://zub.fei.tuke.sk/GIT/walkera0701-joystick
+Connecting to PC:
+At back side of transmitter S-video connector can be found. Modulation
+pulses from processor to HF part can be found at pin 2 of this connector,
+pin 3 is GND. Between pin 3 and CPU 5k6 resistor can be found. To get
+modulation pulses to PC, signal pulses must be amplified.
+Cable: (walkera TX to parport)
+Walkera WK-0701 TX S-VIDEO connector:
+ (back side of TX)
+     __   __              S-video:                                  canon25
+    /  |_|  \             pin 2 (signal)              NPN           parport
+   / O 4 3 O \            pin 3 (GND)        LED        ________________  10 ACK
+  ( O 2   1 O )                                         | C
+   \   ___   /      2 ________________________|\|_____|/
+    | [___] |                                 |/|   B |\
+     -------        3 __________________________________|________________ 25 GND
+                                                          E
+I use green LED and BC109 NPN transistor.
+Software:
+Build kernel with walkera0701 module. Module walkera0701 need exclusive
+access to parport, modules like lp must be unloaded before loading
+walkera0701 module, check dmesg for error messages. Connect TX to PC by
+cable and run jstest /dev/input/js0 to see values from TX. If no value can
+be changed by TX "joystick", check output from /proc/interrupts. Value for
+(usually irq7) parport must increase if TX is on.
+Technical details:
+Driver use interrupt from parport ACK input bit to measure pulse length
+using hrtimers.
+Frame format:
+Based on walkera WK-0701 PCM Format description by Shaul Eizikovich.
+(downloaded from http://www.smartpropoplus.com/Docs/Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf)
+Signal pulses:
+                   (ANALOG)
+    SYNC      BIN   OCT
+  +---------+      +------+
+  |         |      |      |
+--+         +------+      +---
+Frame:
+ SYNC , BIN1, OCT1, BIN2, OCT2 ... BIN24, OCT24, BIN25, next frame SYNC ..
+pulse length:
+   Binary values:               Analog octal values:
+   288 uS Binary 0              318 uS       000
+   438 uS Binary 1              398 uS       001
+                                478 uS       010
+                                558 uS       011
+                                638 uS       100
+  1306 uS SYNC                  718 uS       101
+                                798 uS       110
+                                878 uS       111
+24 bin+oct values + 1 bin value = 24*4+1 bits  = 97 bits
+(Warning, pulses on ACK ar inverted by transistor, irq is rised up on sync
+to bin change or octal value to bin change).
+Binary data representations:
+One binary and octal value can be grouped to nibble. 24 nibbles + one binary
+values can be sampled between sync pulses.
+Values for first four channels (analog joystick values) can be found in
+first 10 nibbles. Analog value is represented by one sign bit and 9 bit
+absolute binary value. (10 bits per channel). Next nibble is checksum for
+first ten nibbles.
+Next nibbles 12 .. 21 represents four channels (not all channels can be
+directly controlled from TX). Binary representations ar the same as in first
+four channels. In nibbles 22 and 23 is a special magic number. Nibble 24 is
+checksum for nibbles 12..23.
+After last octal value for nibble 24 and next sync pulse one additional
+binary value can be sampled. This bit and magic number is not used in
+software driver. Some details about this magic numbers can be found in
+Walkera_Wk-0701_PCM.pdf.
+Checksum calculation:
+Summary of octal values in nibbles must be same as octal value in checksum
+nibble (only first 3 bits are used). Binary value for checksum nibble is
+calculated by sum of binary values in checked nibbles + sum of octal values
+in checked nibbles divided by 8. Only bit 0 of this sum is used.
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
index b880ce5dbd33..f1d639903325 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'B'     C0-FF                           advanced bbus
                                        <mailto:maassen@uni-freiburg.de>
 'C'     all     linux/soundcard.h
-'D'     all     asm-s390/dasd.h
+'D'     all     arch/s390/include/asm/dasd.h
 'E'     all     linux/input.h
 'F'     all     linux/fb.h
 'H'     all     linux/hiddev.h
@@ -97,6 +97,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
                                        <http://linux01.gwdg.de/~alatham/ppdd.html>
 'M'     all     linux/soundcard.h
 'N'     00-1F   drivers/usb/scanner.h
+'O'     00-02   include/mtd/ubi-user.h UBI
 'P'     all     linux/soundcard.h
 'Q'     all     linux/soundcard.h
 'R'     00-1F   linux/random.h
@@ -104,7 +105,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'S'     80-81   scsi/scsi_ioctl.h       conflict!
 'S'     82-FF   scsi/scsi.h             conflict!
 'T'     all     linux/soundcard.h       conflict!
-'T'     all     asm-i386/ioctls.h       conflict!
+'T'     all     arch/x86/include/asm/ioctls.h   conflict!
 'U'     00-EF   linux/drivers/usb/usb.h
 'V'     all     linux/vt.h
 'W'     00-1F   linux/watchdog.h        conflict!
@@ -119,7 +120,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
                                        <mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl>
 'c'     00-7F   linux/comstats.h        conflict!
 'c'     00-7F   linux/coda.h            conflict!
-'c'     80-9F   asm-s390/chsc.h
+'c'     80-9F   arch/s390/include/asm/chsc.h
 'd'     00-FF   linux/char/drm/drm/h    conflict!
 'd'     00-DF   linux/video_decoder.h   conflict!
 'd'     F0-FF   linux/digi1.h
@@ -142,6 +143,9 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
 'n'     00-7F   linux/ncp_fs.h
 'n'     E0-FF   video/matrox.h          matroxfb
 'o'     00-1F   fs/ocfs2/ocfs2_fs.h     OCFS2
+'o'     00-03   include/mtd/ubi-user.h  conflict! (OCFS2 and UBI overlaps)
+'o'     40-41   include/mtd/ubi-user.h  UBI
+'o'     01-A1   include/linux/dvb/*.h DVB
 'p'     00-0F   linux/phantom.h         conflict! (OpenHaptics needs this)
 'p'     00-3F   linux/mc146818rtc.h     conflict!
 'p'     40-7F   linux/nvram.h
@@ -166,7 +170,7 @@ Code	Seq#	Include File		Comments
                                        <mailto:oe@port.de>
 0x80    00-1F   linux/fb.h
 0x81    00-1F   linux/videotext.h
-0x89    00-06   asm-i386/sockios.h
+0x89    00-06   arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h
 0x89    0B-DF   linux/sockios.h
 0x89    E0-EF   linux/sockios.h         SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range
 0x89    F0-FF   linux/sockios.h         SIOCDEVPRIVATE range
diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/stable_kernel_rules.txt b/Documentation/ja_JP/stable_kernel_rules.txt
index b3ffe870de33..14265837c4ce 100644
--- a/Documentation/ja_JP/stable_kernel_rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/stable_kernel_rules.txt
@@ -12,11 +12,11 @@ file at first.
 ==================================
 これは、
-linux-2.6.24/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
+linux-2.6.29/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
 の和訳です。
 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ >
-翻訳日： 2007/12/30
+翻訳日： 2009/1/14
 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com>
 校正者： 武井伸光さん、<takei at webmasters dot gr dot jp>
         かねこさん (Seiji Kaneko) <skaneko at a2 dot mbn dot or dot jp>
@@ -38,12 +38,15 @@ linux-2.6.24/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
 - ビルドエラー(CONFIG_BROKENになっているものを除く), oops, ハング、デー
   タ破壊、現実のセキュリティ問題、その他 "ああ、これはダメだね"という
   ようなものを修正しなければならない。短く言えば、重大な問題。
+ - 新しい device ID とクオークも受け入れられる。
 - どのように競合状態が発生するかの説明も一緒に書かれていない限り、
   "理論的には競合状態になる"ようなものは不可。
 - いかなる些細な修正も含めることはできない。(スペルの修正、空白のクリー
   ンアップなど)
- - 対応するサブシステムメンテナが受け入れたものでなければならない。
 - Documentation/SubmittingPatches の規則に従ったものでなければならない。
+ - パッチ自体か同等の修正が Linus のツリーに既に存在しなければならない。
+　 Linus のツリーでのコミットID を -stable へのパッチ投稿の際に引用す
+   ること。
 -stable ツリーにパッチを送付する手続き-
@@ -52,8 +55,10 @@ linux-2.6.24/Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
 - 送信者はパッチがキューに受け付けられた際には ACK を、却下された場合
   には NAK を受け取る。この反応は開発者たちのスケジュールによって、数
   日かかる場合がある。
- - もし受け取られたら、パッチは他の開発者たちのレビューのために
+ - もし受け取られたら、パッチは他の開発者たちと関連するサブシステムの
-   -stable キューに追加される。
+   メンテナーによるレビューのために -stable キューに追加される。
+ - パッチに stable@kernel.org のアドレスが付加されているときには、それ
+   が Linus のツリーに入る時に自動的に stable チームに email される。
 - セキュリティパッチはこのエイリアス (stable@kernel.org) に送られるべ
   きではなく、代わりに security@kernel.org のアドレスに送られる。
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX
index 114644285454..e8d2b6d83a3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/00-INDEX
@@ -1,5 +1,9 @@
 00-INDEX
-        - this file: info on the kernel build process
+        - this file: info on the kernel build process
+kbuild.txt
+        - developer information on kbuild
+kconfig.txt
+        - usage help for make *config
 kconfig-language.txt
        - specification of Config Language, the language in Kconfig files
 makefiles.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f3355b6812df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+Environment variables
+KCPPFLAGS
+--------------------------------------------------
+Additional options to pass when preprocessing. The preprocessing options
+will be used in all cases where kbuild does preprocessing including
+building C files and assembler files.
+KAFLAGS
+--------------------------------------------------
+Additional options to the assembler.
+KCFLAGS
+--------------------------------------------------
+Additional options to the C compiler.
+KBUILD_VERBOSE
+--------------------------------------------------
+Set the kbuild verbosity. Can be assigned same values as "V=...".
+See make help for the full list.
+Setting "V=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_VERBOSE.
+KBUILD_EXTMOD
+--------------------------------------------------
+Set the directory to look for the kernel source when building external
+modules.
+The directory can be specified in several ways:
+1) Use "M=..." on the command line
+2) Environmnet variable KBUILD_EXTMOD
+3) Environmnet variable SUBDIRS
+The possibilities are listed in the order they take precedence.
+Using "M=..." will always override the others.
+KBUILD_OUTPUT
+--------------------------------------------------
+Specify the output directory when building the kernel.
+The output directory can also be specificed using "O=...".
+Setting "O=..." takes precedence over KBUILD_OUTPUT.
+ARCH
+--------------------------------------------------
+Set ARCH to the architecture to be built.
+In most cases the name of the architecture is the same as the
+directory name found in the arch/ directory.
+But some architectures such as x86 and sparc have aliases.
+x86: i386 for 32 bit, x86_64 for 64 bit
+sparc: sparc for 32 bit, sparc64 for 64 bit
+CROSS_COMPILE
+--------------------------------------------------
+Specify an optional fixed part of the binutils filename.
+CROSS_COMPILE can be a part of the filename or the full path.
+CROSS_COMPILE is also used for ccache is some setups.
+CF
+--------------------------------------------------
+Additional options for sparse.
+CF is often used on the command-line like this:
+    make CF=-Wbitwise C=2
+INSTALL_PATH
+--------------------------------------------------
+INSTALL_PATH specifies where to place the updated kernel and system map
+images. Default is /boot, but you can set it to other values.
+MODLIB
+--------------------------------------------------
+Specify where to install modules.
+The default value is:
+     $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)
+The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
+INSTALL_MOD_PATH
+--------------------------------------------------
+INSTALL_MOD_PATH specifies a prefix to MODLIB for module directory
+relocations required by build roots.  This is not defined in the
+makefile but the argument can be passed to make if needed.
+INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
+--------------------------------------------------
+INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be
+stripped after they are installed.  If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then
+the default option --strip-debug will be used.  Otherwise,
+INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command.
+INSTALL_FW_PATH
+--------------------------------------------------
+INSTALL_FW_PATH specifies where to install the firmware blobs.
+The default value is:
+    $(INSTALL_MOD_PATH)/lib/firmware
+The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
+INSTALL_HDR_PATH
+--------------------------------------------------
+INSTALL_HDR_PATH specifies where to install user space headers when
+executing "make headers_*".
+The default value is:
+    $(objtree)/usr
+$(objtree) is the directory where output files are saved.
+The output directory is often set using "O=..." on the commandline.
+The value can be overridden in which case the default value is ignored.
+KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN
+--------------------------------------------------
+KBUILD_MODPOST_WARN can be set to avoid errors in case of undefined
+symbols in the final module linking stage. It changes such errors
+into warnings.
+KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL
+--------------------------------------------------
+KBUILD_MODPOST_NOFINAL can be set to skip the final link of modules.
+This is solely useful to speed up test compiles.
+KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS
+--------------------------------------------------
+For modules that use symbols from other modules.
+See more details in modules.txt.
+ALLSOURCE_ARCHS
+--------------------------------------------------
+For tags/TAGS/cscope targets, you can specify more than one arch
+to be included in the databases, separated by blank space. E.g.:
+    $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS="x86 mips arm" tags
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..26a7c0a93193
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+This file contains some assistance for using "make *config".
+Use "make help" to list all of the possible configuration targets.
+The xconfig ('qconf') and menuconfig ('mconf') programs also
+have embedded help text.  Be sure to check it for navigation,
+search, and other general help text.
+======================================================================
+General
+--------------------------------------------------
+New kernel releases often introduce new config symbols.  Often more
+important, new kernel releases may rename config symbols.  When
+this happens, using a previously working .config file and running
+"make oldconfig" won't necessarily produce a working new kernel
+for you, so you may find that you need to see what NEW kernel
+symbols have been introduced.
+To see a list of new config symbols when using "make oldconfig", use
+        cp user/some/old.config .config
+        yes "" | make oldconfig >conf.new
+and the config program will list as (NEW) any new symbols that have
+unknown values.  Of course, the .config file is also updated with
+new (default) values, so you can use:
+        grep "(NEW)" conf.new
+to see the new config symbols or you can 'diff' the previous and
+new .config files to see the differences:
+        diff .config.old .config | less
+(Yes, we need something better here.)
+======================================================================
+menuconfig
+--------------------------------------------------
+SEARCHING for CONFIG symbols
+Searching in menuconfig:
+        The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol
+        names, so you have to know something close to what you are
+        looking for.
+        Example:
+                /hotplug
+                This lists all config symbols that contain "hotplug",
+                e.g., HOTPLUG, HOTPLUG_CPU, MEMORY_HOTPLUG.
+        For search help, enter / followed TAB-TAB-TAB (to highlight
+        <Help>) and Enter.  This will tell you that you can also use
+        regular expressions (regexes) in the search string, so if you
+        are not interested in MEMORY_HOTPLUG, you could try
+                /^hotplug
+______________________________________________________________________
+Color Themes for 'menuconfig'
+It is possible to select different color themes using the variable
+MENUCONFIG_COLOR.  To select a theme use:
+        make MENUCONFIG_COLOR=<theme> menuconfig
+Available themes are:
+  mono       => selects colors suitable for monochrome displays
+  blackbg    => selects a color scheme with black background
+  classic    => theme with blue background. The classic look
+  bluetitle  => a LCD friendly version of classic. (default)
+______________________________________________________________________
+Environment variables in 'menuconfig'
+KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG
+--------------------------------------------------
+(partially based on lkml email from/by Rob Landley, re: miniconfig)
+--------------------------------------------------
+The allyesconfig/allmodconfig/allnoconfig/randconfig variants can
+also use the environment variable KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG as a flag or a
+filename that contains config symbols that the user requires to be
+set to a specific value.  If KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG is used without a
+filename, "make *config" checks for a file named
+"all{yes/mod/no/random}.config" (corresponding to the *config command
+that was used) for symbol values that are to be forced.  If this file
+is not found, it checks for a file named "all.config" to contain forced
+values.
+This enables you to create "miniature" config (miniconfig) or custom
+config files containing just the config symbols that you are interested
+in.  Then the kernel config system generates the full .config file,
+including dependencies of your miniconfig file, based on the miniconfig
+file.
+This 'KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG' file is a config file which contains
+(usually a subset of all) preset config symbols.  These variable
+settings are still subject to normal dependency checks.
+Examples:
+        KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=custom-notebook.config make allnoconfig
+or
+        KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config make allnoconfig
+or
+        make KCONFIG_ALLCONFIG=mini.config allnoconfig
+These examples will disable most options (allnoconfig) but enable or
+disable the options that are explicitly listed in the specified
+mini-config files.
+KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
+--------------------------------------------------
+If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
+config udpates (requires explicit updates).
+KCONFIG_CONFIG
+--------------------------------------------------
+This environment variable can be used to specify a default kernel config
+file name to override the default name of ".config".
+KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG
+--------------------------------------------------
+If you set KCONFIG_OVERWRITECONFIG in the environment, Kconfig will not
+break symlinks when .config is a symlink to somewhere else.
+KCONFIG_NOTIMESTAMP
+--------------------------------------------------
+If this environment variable exists and is non-null, the timestamp line
+in generated .config files is omitted.
+KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
+--------------------------------------------------
+This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
+"auto.conf" file.  Its default value is "include/config/auto.conf".
+KCONFIG_AUTOHEADER
+--------------------------------------------------
+This environment variable can be set to specify the path & name of the
+"autoconf.h" (header) file.  Its default value is "include/linux/autoconf.h".
+______________________________________________________________________
+menuconfig User Interface Options
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+MENUCONFIG_MODE
+--------------------------------------------------
+This mode shows all sub-menus in one large tree.
+Example:
+        MENUCONFIG_MODE=single_menu make menuconfig
+======================================================================
+xconfig
+--------------------------------------------------
+Searching in xconfig:
+        The Search function searches for kernel configuration symbol
+        names, so you have to know something close to what you are
+        looking for.
+        Example:
+                Ctrl-F hotplug
+        or
+                Menu: File, Search, hotplug
+        lists all config symbol entries that contain "hotplug" in
+        the symbol name.  In this Search dialog, you may change the
+        config setting for any of the entries that are not grayed out.
+        You can also enter a different search string without having
+        to return to the main menu.
+======================================================================
+gconfig
+--------------------------------------------------
+Searching in gconfig:
+        None (gconfig isn't maintained as well as xconfig or menuconfig);
+        however, gconfig does have a few more viewing choices than
+        xconfig does.
+###
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
index 1821c077b435..b1096da953c8 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ following files:
                # Module specific targets
                genbin:
-                        echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped
+                        echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped
        In example 2, we are down to two fairly simple files and for simple
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ following files:
                # Module specific targets
                genbin:
-                        echo "X" > 8123_bin_shipped
+                        echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped
                endif
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
index c6841eee9598..d73fbd2b2b45 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt
@@ -71,6 +71,11 @@ The @argument descriptions must begin on the very next line following
 this opening short function description line, with no intervening
 empty comment lines.
+If a function parameter is "..." (varargs), it should be listed in
+kernel-doc notation as:
+ * @...: description
 Example kernel-doc data structure comment.
 /**
@@ -282,6 +287,32 @@ struct my_struct {
 };
+Including documentation blocks in source files
+----------------------------------------------
+To facilitate having source code and comments close together, you can
+include kernel-doc documentation blocks that are free-form comments
+instead of being kernel-doc for functions, structures, unions,
+enums, or typedefs.  This could be used for something like a
+theory of operation for a driver or library code, for example.
+This is done by using a DOC: section keyword with a section title.  E.g.:
+/**
+ * DOC: Theory of Operation
+ *
+ * The whizbang foobar is a dilly of a gizmo.  It can do whatever you
+ * want it to do, at any time.  It reads your mind.  Here's how it works.
+ *
+ * foo bar splat
+ *
+ * The only drawback to this gizmo is that is can sometimes damage
+ * hardware, software, or its subject(s).
+ */
+DOC: sections are used in SGML templates files as indicated below.
 How to make new SGML template files
 -----------------------------------
@@ -302,6 +333,9 @@ exported using EXPORT_SYMBOL.
 !F<filename> <function [functions...]> is replaced by the
 documentation, in <filename>, for the functions listed.
+!P<filename> <section title> is replaced by the contents of the DOC:
+section titled <section title> from <filename>.
+Spaces are allowed in <section title>; do not quote the <section title>.
 Tim.
 */ <twaugh@redhat.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 31e0c2c3c6e3..8cc40a1bee06 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -92,6 +92,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
        SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
        FTRACE  Function tracing enabled.
        TS      Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
+        UMS     USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
        USB     USB support is enabled.
        USBHID  USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
        V4L     Video For Linux support is enabled.
@@ -141,6 +142,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        ht -- run only enough ACPI to enable Hyper Threading
                        strict -- Be less tolerant of platforms that are not
                                strictly ACPI specification compliant.
+                        rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT
                        See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
@@ -151,16 +153,20 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        default: 0
        acpi_sleep=     [HW,ACPI] Sleep options
-                        Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering }
+                        Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig,
-                        See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode.
+                                  old_ordering, s4_nonvs }
+                        See Documentation/power/video.txt for information on
+                        s3_bios and s3_mode.
                        s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep
                        as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called.
                        s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being
                        used during resume from hibernation.
                        old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS
-                        control method, wrt putting devices into low power
+                        control method, with respect to putting devices into
-                        states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is
+                        low power states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering
-                        used by default).
+                        of _PTS is used by default).
+                        s4_nonvs prevents the kernel from saving/restoring the
+                        ACPI NVS memory during hibernation.
        acpi_sci=       [HW,ACPI] ACPI System Control Interrupt trigger mode
                        Format: { level | edge | high | low }
@@ -195,7 +201,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        acpi_skip_timer_override [HW,ACPI]
                        Recognize and ignore IRQ0/pin2 Interrupt Override.
                        For broken nForce2 BIOS resulting in XT-PIC timer.
-        acpi_use_timer_override [HW,ACPI}
+        acpi_use_timer_override [HW,ACPI]
                        Use timer override. For some broken Nvidia NF5 boards
                        that require a timer override, but don't have
                        HPET
@@ -470,8 +476,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        clearcpuid=BITNUM [X86]
                        Disable CPUID feature X for the kernel. See
-                        include/asm-x86/cpufeature.h for the valid bit numbers.
+                        arch/x86/include/asm/cpufeature.h for the valid bit
-                        Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily
+                        numbers. Note the Linux specific bits are not necessarily
                        stable over kernel options, but the vendor specific
                        ones should be.
                        Also note that user programs calling CPUID directly
@@ -552,6 +558,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        not work reliably with all consoles, but is known
                        to work with serial and VGA consoles.
+        coredump_filter=
+                        [KNL] Change the default value for
+                        /proc/<pid>/coredump_filter.
+                        See also Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt.
        cpcihp_generic= [HW,PCI] Generic port I/O CompactPCI driver
                        Format:
                        <first_slot>,<last_slot>,<port>,<enum_bit>[,<debug>]
@@ -567,9 +578,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        a memory unit (amount[KMG]). See also
                        Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt for a example.
-        cs4232=         [HW,OSS]
-                        Format: <io>,<irq>,<dma>,<dma2>,<mpuio>,<mpuirq>
        cs89x0_dma=     [HW,NET]
                        Format: <dma>
@@ -722,10 +730,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        Default value is 0.
                        Value can be changed at runtime via /selinux/enforce.
-        es1371=         [HW,OSS]
-                        Format: <spdif>,[<nomix>,[<amplifier>]]
-                        See also header of sound/oss/es1371.c.
        ether=          [HW,NET] Ethernet cards parameters
                        This option is obsoleted by the "netdev=" option, which
                        has equivalent usage. See its documentation for details.
@@ -824,8 +828,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        hlt             [BUGS=ARM,SH]
-        hvc_iucv=       [S390] Number of z/VM IUCV Hypervisor console (HVC)
+        hvc_iucv=       [S390] Number of z/VM IUCV hypervisor console (HVC)
-                               back-ends. Valid parameters: 0..8
+                               terminal devices. Valid values: 0..8
        i8042.debug     [HW] Toggle i8042 debug mode
        i8042.direct    [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
@@ -873,17 +877,19 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        See Documentation/ide/ide.txt.
        idle=           [X86]
-                        Format: idle=poll or idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
+                        Format: idle=poll, idle=mwait, idle=halt, idle=nomwait
-                        Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly improves the performance
+                        Poll forces a polling idle loop that can slightly
-                        of waking up a idle CPU, but will use a lot of power and make the system
+                        improve the performance of waking up a idle CPU, but
-                        run hot. Not recommended.
+                        will use a lot of power and make the system run hot.
-                        idle=mwait. On systems which support MONITOR/MWAIT but the kernel chose
+                        Not recommended.
-                        to not use it because it doesn't save as much power as a normal idle
+                        idle=mwait: On systems which support MONITOR/MWAIT but
-                        loop use the MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be the same
+                        the kernel chose to not use it because it doesn't save
-                        as idle=poll.
+                        as much power as a normal idle loop, use the
-                        idle=halt. Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
+                        MONITOR/MWAIT idle loop anyways. Performance should be
+                        the same as idle=poll.
+                        idle=halt: Halt is forced to be used for CPU idle.
                        In such case C2/C3 won't be used again.
-                        idle=nomwait. Disable mwait for CPU C-states
+                        idle=nomwait: Disable mwait for CPU C-states
        ide-pci-generic.all-generic-ide [HW] (E)IDE subsystem
                        Claim all unknown PCI IDE storage controllers.
@@ -923,6 +929,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        inttest=        [IA64]
+        iomem=          Disable strict checking of access to MMIO memory
+                strict  regions from userspace.
+                relaxed
        iommu=          [x86]
                off
                force
@@ -1074,8 +1084,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        lapic           [X86-32,APIC] Enable the local APIC even if BIOS
                        disabled it.
-        lapic_timer_c2_ok       [X86-32,x86-64,APIC] trust the local apic timer in
+        lapic_timer_c2_ok       [X86-32,x86-64,APIC] trust the local apic timer
-                        C2 power state.
+                        in C2 power state.
        libata.dma=     [LIBATA] DMA control
                        libata.dma=0      Disable all PATA and SATA DMA
@@ -1127,6 +1137,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        If there are multiple matching configurations changing
                        the same attribute, the last one is used.
+        lmb=debug       [KNL] Enable lmb debug messages.
        load_ramdisk=   [RAM] List of ramdisks to load from floppy
                        See Documentation/blockdev/ramdisk.txt.
@@ -1560,6 +1572,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        nosoftlockup    [KNL] Disable the soft-lockup detector.
+        noswapaccount   [KNL] Disable accounting of swap in memory resource
+                        controller. (See Documentation/controllers/memory.txt)
        nosync          [HW,M68K] Disables sync negotiation for all devices.
        notsc           [BUGS=X86-32] Disable Time Stamp Counter
@@ -1579,6 +1594,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        nr_uarts=       [SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered.
+        ohci1394_dma=early      [HW] enable debugging via the ohci1394 driver.
+                        See Documentation/debugging-via-ohci1394.txt for more
+                        info.
        olpc_ec_timeout= [OLPC] ms delay when issuing EC commands
                        Rather than timing out after 20 ms if an EC
                        command is not properly ACKed, override the length
@@ -1803,10 +1822,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        autoconfiguration.
                        Ranges are in pairs (memory base and size).
-        dynamic_printk
+        dynamic_printk  Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if
-                        Enables pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls if
+                        CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled.
-                        CONFIG_DYNAMIC_PRINTK_DEBUG has been enabled. These can also
+                        These can also be switched on/off via
-                        be switched on/off via <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules
+                        <debugfs>/dynamic_printk/modules
        print-fatal-signals=
                        [KNL] debug: print fatal signals
@@ -1894,7 +1913,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        reboot=         [BUGS=X86-32,BUGS=ARM,BUGS=IA-64] Rebooting mode
                        Format: <reboot_mode>[,<reboot_mode2>[,...]]
-                        See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c                   
+                        See arch/*/kernel/reboot.c or arch/*/kernel/process.c
        relax_domain_level=
                        [KNL, SMP] Set scheduler's default relax_domain_level.
@@ -2294,7 +2313,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        thermal.psv=    [HW,ACPI]
                        -1: disable all passive trip points
-                        <degrees C>: override all passive trip points to this value
+                        <degrees C>: override all passive trip points to this
+                        value
        thermal.tzp=    [HW,ACPI]
                        Specify global default ACPI thermal zone polling rate
@@ -2382,6 +2402,41 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
        usbhid.mousepoll=
                        [USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
+        usb-storage.delay_use=
+                        [UMS] The delay in seconds before a new device is
+                        scanned for Logical Units (default 5).
+        usb-storage.quirks=
+                        [UMS] A list of quirks entries to supplement or
+                        override the built-in unusual_devs list.  List
+                        entries are separated by commas.  Each entry has
+                        the form VID:PID:Flags where VID and PID are Vendor
+                        and Product ID values (4-digit hex numbers) and
+                        Flags is a set of characters, each corresponding
+                        to a common usb-storage quirk flag as follows:
+                                a = SANE_SENSE (collect more than 18 bytes
+                                        of sense data);
+                                c = FIX_CAPACITY (decrease the reported
+                                        device capacity by one sector);
+                                h = CAPACITY_HEURISTICS (decrease the
+                                        reported device capacity by one
+                                        sector if the number is odd);
+                                i = IGNORE_DEVICE (don't bind to this
+                                        device);
+                                l = NOT_LOCKABLE (don't try to lock and
+                                        unlock ejectable media);
+                                m = MAX_SECTORS_64 (don't transfer more
+                                        than 64 sectors = 32 KB at a time);
+                                o = CAPACITY_OK (accept the capacity
+                                        reported by the device);
+                                r = IGNORE_RESIDUE (the device reports
+                                        bogus residue values);
+                                s = SINGLE_LUN (the device has only one
+                                        Logical Unit);
+                                w = NO_WP_DETECT (don't test whether the
+                                        medium is write-protected).
+                        Example: quirks=0419:aaf5:rl,0421:0433:rc
        add_efi_memmap  [EFI; x86-32,X86-64] Include EFI memory map in
                        kernel's map of available physical RAM.
@@ -2442,8 +2497,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
                        Format:
                        <irq>,<irq_mask>,<io>,<full_duplex>,<do_sound>,<lockup_hack>[,<irq2>[,<irq3>[,<irq4>]]]
-        norandmaps      Don't use address space randomization
+        norandmaps      Don't use address space randomization.  Equivalent to
-                        Equivalent to echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space
+                        echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space
 ______________________________________________________________________
diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt
index f5d2aad65a67..b2e374586bd8 100644
--- a/Documentation/kobject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt
@@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ the name of the kobject, call kobject_rename():
    int kobject_rename(struct kobject *kobj, const char *new_name);
-Note kobject_rename does perform any locking or have a solid notion of
+kobject_rename does not perform any locking or have a solid notion of
-what names are valid so the provide must provide their own sanity checking
+what names are valid so the caller must provide their own sanity checking
 and serialization.
 There is a function called kobject_set_name() but that is legacy cruft and
diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
index a79633d702bf..48b3de90eb1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
@@ -497,7 +497,10 @@ The first column provides the kernel address where the probe is inserted.
 The second column identifies the type of probe (k - kprobe, r - kretprobe
 and j - jprobe), while the third column specifies the symbol+offset of
 the probe. If the probed function belongs to a module, the module name
-is also specified.
+is also specified. Following columns show probe status. If the probe is on
+a virtual address that is no longer valid (module init sections, module
+virtual addresses that correspond to modules that've been unloaded),
+such probes are marked with [GONE].
 /debug/kprobes/enabled: Turn kprobes ON/OFF
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 71f0fe1fc1b0..41bc99fa1884 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
                     ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
-                            Version 0.21
+                            Version 0.22
-                           May 29th, 2008
+                        November 23rd,  2008
               Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
             Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -16,7 +16,8 @@ supported by the generic Linux ACPI drivers.
 This driver used to be named ibm-acpi until kernel 2.6.21 and release
 0.13-20070314.  It used to be in the drivers/acpi tree, but it was
 moved to the drivers/misc tree and renamed to thinkpad-acpi for kernel
-2.6.22, and release 0.14.
+2.6.22, and release 0.14.  It was moved to drivers/platform/x86 for
+kernel 2.6.29 and release 0.22.
 The driver is named "thinkpad-acpi".  In some places, like module
 names, "thinkpad_acpi" is used because of userspace issues.
@@ -1412,6 +1413,24 @@ Sysfs notes:
        rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw": refer to
        Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
+EXPERIMENTAL: UWB
+-----------------
+This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because it has not been extensively
+tested and validated in various ThinkPad models yet.  The feature may not
+work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply
+the experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
+sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw"
+This feature exports an rfkill controller for the UWB device, if one is
+present and enabled in the BIOS.
+Sysfs notes:
+        rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw": refer to
+        Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
 Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
 ------------------------------------
@@ -1475,7 +1494,7 @@ Sysfs interface changelog:
 0x020100:       Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling
                support.  If you must, use it to know you should not
-                start an userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when
+                start a userspace NVRAM poller (allows to detect when
                NVRAM is compiled out by the user because it is
                unneeded/undesired in the first place).
 0x020101:       Marker for thinkpad-acpi with hot key NVRAM polling
diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile
index 725eef81cd48..1f4f9e888bd1 100644
--- a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 # This creates the demonstration utility "lguest" which runs a Linux guest.
-CFLAGS:=-Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -I../../include -I../../arch/x86/include
+CFLAGS:=-Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -I../../include -I../../arch/x86/include -U_FORTIFY_SOURCE
 LDLIBS:=-lz
 all: lguest
diff --git a/Documentation/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/magic-number.txt
index 95070028d15e..505f19607542 100644
--- a/Documentation/magic-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/magic-number.txt
@@ -125,14 +125,14 @@ TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC    0x5072696E  trident_card      sound/oss/trident.c
 ROUTER_MAGIC          0x524d4157  wan_device        include/linux/wanrouter.h
 SCC_MAGIC             0x52696368  gs_port           drivers/char/scc.h
 SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1       0x53415645  savekmsg          arch/*/amiga/config.c
-GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552  gda               include/asm-mips64/sn/gda.h
+GDA_MAGIC             0x58464552  gda               arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
 RED_MAGIC1            0x5a2cf071  (any)             mm/slab.c
 STL_PORTMAGIC         0x5a7182c9  stlport           include/linux/stallion.h
 EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE    0x5ab478d2  lanai_dev         drivers/atm/lanai.c
 HDLCDRV_MAGIC         0x5ac6e778  hdlcdrv_state     include/linux/hdlcdrv.h
 EPCA_MAGIC            0x5c6df104  channel           include/linux/epca.h
 PCXX_MAGIC            0x5c6df104  channel           drivers/char/pcxx.h
-KV_MAGIC              0x5f4b565f  kernel_vars_s     include/asm-mips64/sn/klkernvars.h
+KV_MAGIC              0x5f4b565f  kernel_vars_s     arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h
 I810_STATE_MAGIC      0x63657373  i810_state        sound/oss/i810_audio.c
 TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC   0x63657373  trient_state      sound/oss/trident.c
 M3_CARD_MAGIC         0x646e6f50  m3_card           sound/oss/maestro3.c
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ CCB_MAGIC             0xf2691ad2  ccb               drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c
 QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE      0xf7e1c9a3  queue_entry       drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
 QUEUE_MAGIC_USED      0xf7e1cc33  queue_entry       drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
 HTB_CMAGIC            0xFEFAFEF1  htb_class         net/sched/sch_htb.c
-NMI_MAGIC             0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s        include/asm-mips64/sn/nmi.h
+NMI_MAGIC             0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s        arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h
 Note that there are also defined special per-driver magic numbers in sound
 memory management. See include/sound/sndmagic.h for complete list of them. Many
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
index 168117bd6ee8..4c2ecf537a4a 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ config options.
    This option can be kernel module too.
 --------------------------------
-3 sysfs files for memory hotplug
+4 sysfs files for memory hotplug
 --------------------------------
 All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as
@@ -138,11 +138,12 @@ For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at
 (0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4)
 This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000)
-Under each section, you can see 3 files.
+Under each section, you can see 4 files.
 /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index
 /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device
 /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
+/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable
 'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX.
 'state'      : read-write
@@ -150,10 +151,20 @@ Under each section, you can see 3 files.
               at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command
 'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device.
               This is not well implemented now.
+'removable'  : read-only: contains an integer value indicating
+               whether the memory section is removable or not
+               removable.  A value of 1 indicates that the memory
+               section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that
+               it is not removable.
 NOTE:
  These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase.
+If CONFIG_NUMA is enabled the
+/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX memory section
+directories can also be accessed via symbolic links located in
+the /sys/devices/system/node/node* directories.  For example:
+/sys/devices/system/node/node0/memory9 -> ../../memory/memory9
 --------------------------------
 4. Physical memory hot-add phase
@@ -365,7 +376,6 @@ node if necessary.
  - allowing memory hot-add to ZONE_MOVABLE. maybe we need some switch like
    sysctl or new control file.
  - showing memory section and physical device relationship.
-  - showing memory section and node relationship (maybe good for NUMA)
  - showing memory section is under ZONE_MOVABLE or not
  - test and make it better memory offlining.
  - support HugeTLB page migration and offlining.
diff --git a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README
index 25a6ed1aaa5b..8ace35ebdcd5 100644
--- a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README
+++ b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATABILITY
 Two files are introduced:
-  a) 'include/asm-mips/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
+  a) 'arch/mips/include/asm/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h'
     containes : struct _auide_hwif
                 timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4
                 timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2
@@ -52,14 +52,12 @@ Two files are introduced:
  b) 'drivers/ide/mips/au1xxx-ide.c'
     contains the functionality of the AU1XXX IDE driver
-Four configs variables are introduced:
+Following extra configs variables are introduced:
  CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_PIO_DBDMA    - enable the PIO+DBDMA mode
  CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA  - enable the MWDMA mode
  CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_BURSTABLE_ON - set Burstable FIFO in DBDMA
                                           controller
-  CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ - maximum transfer size
-                                           per descriptor
 SUPPORTED IDE MODES
@@ -87,7 +85,6 @@ CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA_PCI=y
 CONFIG_IDEDMA_PCI_AUTO=y
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX=y
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA=y
-CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ=128
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA=y
 CONFIG_IDEDMA_AUTO=y
@@ -105,7 +102,6 @@ CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA_PCI=y
 CONFIG_IDEDMA_PCI_AUTO=y
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX=y
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_MDMA2_DBDMA=y
-CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDE_AU1XXX_SEQTS_PER_RQ=128
 CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDEDMA=y
 CONFIG_IDEDMA_AUTO=y
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt
index cd12c2ff518a..85046f53fcfc 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/alias.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/alias.txt
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 IP-Aliasing:
 ============
-IP-aliases are additional IP-addresses/masks hooked up to a base 
+IP-aliases are an obsolete way to manage multiple IP-addresses/masks
-interface by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig. 
+per interface. Newer tools such as iproute2 support multiple
-This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must.
+address/prefixes per interface, but aliases are still supported
+for backwards compatibility.
-IP-Aliases are avail if CONFIG_INET (`standard' IPv4 networking) 
-is configured in the kernel.
+An alias is formed by adding a colon and a string when running ifconfig.
+This string is usually numeric, but this is not a must.
 o Alias creation.
  Alias creation is done by 'magic' interface naming: eg. to create a
@@ -38,16 +38,3 @@ o Relationship with main device
  If the base device is shut down the added aliases will be deleted 
  too.
-Contact
-------
-Please finger or e-mail me:
-   Juan Jose Ciarlante <jjciarla@raiz.uncu.edu.ar>
-Updated by Erik Schoenfelder <schoenfr@gaertner.DE>
-; local variables:
-; mode: indented-text
-; mode: auto-fill
-; end:
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
index 3c2f2b328638..8d022073e3ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/netconsole.txt
@@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ Built-in netconsole starts immediately after the TCP stack is
 initialized and attempts to bring up the supplied dev at the supplied
 address.
-The remote host can run either 'netcat -u -l -p <port>' or syslogd.
+The remote host can run either 'netcat -u -l -p <port>',
+'nc -l -u <port>' or syslogd.
 Dynamic reconfiguration:
 ========================
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
index c3669a3fb4af..60d05eb77c64 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ A client would issue an operation by:
     MSG_MORE should be set in msghdr::msg_flags on all but the last part of
     the request.  Multiple requests may be made simultaneously.
-     If a call is intended to go to a destination other then the default
+     If a call is intended to go to a destination other than the default
     specified through connect(), then msghdr::msg_name should be set on the
     first request message of that call.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
index 839cbb71388b..c0aab985bad9 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ As mentioned above, main purpose of TUN/TAP driver is tunneling.
 It is used by VTun (http://vtun.sourceforge.net).
 Another interesting application using TUN/TAP is pipsecd
-(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), an userspace IPSec
+(http://perso.enst.fr/~beyssac/pipsec/), a userspace IPSec
 implementation that can use complete kernel routing (unlike FreeS/WAN).
 3. How does Virtual network device actually work ? 
diff --git a/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt b/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt
index 7714f57caad5..b565e8279d13 100644
--- a/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt
@@ -109,12 +109,18 @@ and it's also much more restricted in the latter case:
 FURTHER NOTES ON NO-MMU MMAP
 ============================
- (*) A request for a private mapping of less than a page in size may not return
+ (*) A request for a private mapping of a file may return a buffer that is not
-     a page-aligned buffer. This is because the kernel calls kmalloc() to
+     page-aligned.  This is because XIP may take place, and the data may not be
-     allocate the buffer, not get_free_page().
+     paged aligned in the backing store.
- (*) A list of all the mappings on the system is visible through /proc/maps in
+ (*) A request for an anonymous mapping will always be page aligned.  If
-     no-MMU mode.
+     possible the size of the request should be a power of two otherwise some
+     of the space may be wasted as the kernel must allocate a power-of-2
+     granule but will only discard the excess if appropriately configured as
+     this has an effect on fragmentation.
+ (*) A list of all the private copy and anonymous mappings on the system is
+     visible through /proc/maps in no-MMU mode.
 (*) A list of all the mappings in use by a process is visible through
     /proc/<pid>/maps in no-MMU mode.
@@ -242,3 +248,18 @@ PROVIDING SHAREABLE BLOCK DEVICE SUPPORT
 Provision of shared mappings on block device files is exactly the same as for
 character devices. If there isn't a real device underneath, then the driver
 should allocate sufficient contiguous memory to honour any supported mapping.
+=================================
+ADJUSTING PAGE TRIMMING BEHAVIOUR
+=================================
+NOMMU mmap automatically rounds up to the nearest power-of-2 number of pages
+when performing an allocation.  This can have adverse effects on memory
+fragmentation, and as such, is left configurable.  The default behaviour is to
+aggressively trim allocations and discard any excess pages back in to the page
+allocator.  In order to retain finer-grained control over fragmentation, this
+behaviour can either be disabled completely, or bumped up to a higher page
+watermark where trimming begins.
+Page trimming behaviour is configurable via the sysctl `vm.nr_trim_pages'.
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
index 472739880e87..ffa4183fdb8b 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/cpu_features.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ anyways).
 After detecting the processor type, the kernel patches out sections of code
 that shouldn't be used by writing nop's over it. Using cpufeatures requires
-just 2 macros (found in include/asm-ppc/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
+just 2 macros (found in arch/powerpc/include/asm/cputable.h), as seen in head.S
 transfer_to_handler:
        #ifdef CONFIG_ALTIVEC
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..869f0b5f16e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/4xx/ndfc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+AMCC NDFC (NanD Flash Controller)
+Required properties:
+- compatible : "ibm,ndfc".
+- reg : should specify chip select and size used for the chip (0x2000).
+Optional properties:
+- ccr : NDFC config and control register value (default 0).
+- bank-settings : NDFC bank configuration register value (default 0).
+Notes:
+- partition(s) - follows the OF MTD standard for partitions
+Example:
+ndfc@1,0 {
+        compatible = "ibm,ndfc";
+        reg = <0x00000001 0x00000000 0x00002000>;
+        ccr = <0x00001000>;
+        bank-settings = <0x80002222>;
+        #address-cells = <1>;
+        #size-cells = <1>;
+        nand {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                partition@0 {
+                        label = "kernel";
+                        reg = <0x00000000 0x00200000>;
+                };
+                partition@200000 {
+                        label = "root";
+                        reg = <0x00200000 0x03E00000>;
+                };
+        };
+};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt
index 81a917ef96e9..6c974d28eeb4 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/board.txt
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA.
 Required properities:
 - compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis".
- reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register
+- reg : should contain the address and the length of the FPPGA register
  set.
 Example (MPC8610HPCD):
@@ -27,3 +27,33 @@ Example (MPC8610HPCD):
                compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis";
                reg = <0xe8000000 32>;
        };
+* Freescale BCSR GPIO banks
+Some BCSR registers act as simple GPIO controllers, each such
+register can be represented by the gpio-controller node.
+Required properities:
+- compatible : Should be "fsl,<board>-bcsr-gpio".
+- reg : Should contain the address and the length of the GPIO bank
+  register.
+- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
+  second cell is used to specify optional paramters (currently unused).
+- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
+Example:
+        bcsr@1,0 {
+                #address-cells = <1>;
+                #size-cells = <1>;
+                compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr";
+                reg = <1 0 0x8000>;
+                ranges = <0 1 0 0x8000>;
+                bcsr13: gpio-controller@d {
+                        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+                        compatible = "fsl,mpc8360mds-bcsr-gpio";
+                        reg = <0xd 1>;
+                        gpio-controller;
+                };
+        };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8447fd7090d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mpc5200.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
+----------------------------
+(c) 2006-2009 Secret Lab Technologies Ltd
+Grant Likely <grant.likely@secretlab.ca>
+Naming conventions
+------------------
+For mpc5200 on-chip devices, the format for each compatible value is
+<chip>-<device>[-<mode>].  The OS should be able to match a device driver
+to the device based solely on the compatible value.  If two drivers
+match on the compatible list; the 'most compatible' driver should be
+selected.
+The split between the MPC5200 and the MPC5200B leaves a bit of a
+conundrum.  How should the compatible property be set up to provide
+maximum compatibility information; but still accurately describe the
+chip?  For the MPC5200; the answer is easy.  Most of the SoC devices
+originally appeared on the MPC5200.  Since they didn't exist anywhere
+else; the 5200 compatible properties will contain only one item;
+"fsl,mpc5200-<device>".
+The 5200B is almost the same as the 5200, but not quite.  It fixes
+silicon bugs and it adds a small number of enhancements.  Most of the
+devices either provide exactly the same interface as on the 5200.  A few
+devices have extra functions but still have a backwards compatible mode.
+To express this information as completely as possible, 5200B device trees
+should have two items in the compatible list:
+        compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-<device>","fsl,mpc5200-<device>";
+It is *strongly* recommended that 5200B device trees follow this convention
+(instead of only listing the base mpc5200 item).
+ie. ethernet on mpc5200: compatible = "fsl,mpc5200-fec";
+    ethernet on mpc5200b: compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-fec", "fsl,mpc5200-fec";
+Modal devices, like PSCs, also append the configured function to the
+end of the compatible field.  ie. A PSC in i2s mode would specify
+"fsl,mpc5200-psc-i2s", not "fsl,mpc5200-i2s".  This convention is chosen to
+avoid naming conflicts with non-psc devices providing the same
+function.  For example, "fsl,mpc5200-spi" and "fsl,mpc5200-psc-spi" describe
+the mpc5200 simple spi device and a PSC spi mode respectively.
+At the time of writing, exact chip may be either 'fsl,mpc5200' or
+'fsl,mpc5200b'.
+The soc node
+------------
+This node describes the on chip SOC peripherals.  Every mpc5200 based
+board will have this node, and as such there is a common naming
+convention for SOC devices.
+Required properties:
+name                    description
+----                    -----------
+ranges                  Memory range of the internal memory mapped registers.
+                        Should be <0 [baseaddr] 0xc000>
+reg                     Should be <[baseaddr] 0x100>
+compatible              mpc5200: "fsl,mpc5200-immr"
+                        mpc5200b: "fsl,mpc5200b-immr"
+system-frequency        'fsystem' frequency in Hz; XLB, IPB, USB and PCI
+                        clocks are derived from the fsystem clock.
+bus-frequency           IPB bus frequency in Hz.  Clock rate
+                        used by most of the soc devices.
+soc child nodes
+---------------
+Any on chip SOC devices available to Linux must appear as soc5200 child nodes.
+Note: The tables below show the value for the mpc5200.  A mpc5200b device
+tree should use the "fsl,mpc5200b-<device>","fsl,mpc5200-<device>" form.
+Required soc5200 child nodes:
+name                            compatible              Description
+----                            ----------              -----------
+cdm@<addr>                      fsl,mpc5200-cdm         Clock Distribution
+interrupt-controller@<addr>     fsl,mpc5200-pic         need an interrupt
+                                                        controller to boot
+bestcomm@<addr>                 fsl,mpc5200-bestcomm    Bestcomm DMA controller
+Recommended soc5200 child nodes; populate as needed for your board
+name            compatible              Description
+----            ----------              -----------
+timer@<addr>    fsl,mpc5200-gpt          General purpose timers
+gpio@<addr>     fsl,mpc5200-gpio         MPC5200 simple gpio controller
+gpio@<addr>     fsl,mpc5200-gpio-wkup    MPC5200 wakeup gpio controller
+rtc@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-rtc          Real time clock
+mscan@<addr>    fsl,mpc5200-mscan        CAN bus controller
+pci@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-pci          PCI bridge
+serial@<addr>   fsl,mpc5200-psc-uart     PSC in serial mode
+i2s@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-psc-i2s      PSC in i2s mode
+ac97@<addr>     fsl,mpc5200-psc-ac97     PSC in ac97 mode
+spi@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-psc-spi      PSC in spi mode
+irda@<addr>     fsl,mpc5200-psc-irda     PSC in IrDA mode
+spi@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-spi          MPC5200 spi device
+ethernet@<addr> fsl,mpc5200-fec          MPC5200 ethernet device
+ata@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-ata          IDE ATA interface
+i2c@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-i2c          I2C controller
+usb@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-ohci,ohci-be USB controller
+xlb@<addr>      fsl,mpc5200-xlb          XLB arbitrator
+fsl,mpc5200-gpt nodes
+---------------------
+On the mpc5200 and 5200b, GPT0 has a watchdog timer function.  If the board
+design supports the internal wdt, then the device node for GPT0 should
+include the empty property 'fsl,has-wdt'.
+An mpc5200-gpt can be used as a single line GPIO controller.  To do so,
+add the following properties to the gpt node:
+        gpio-controller;
+        #gpio-cells = <2>;
+When referencing the GPIO line from another node, the first cell must always
+be zero and the second cell represents the gpio flags and described in the
+gpio device tree binding.
+An mpc5200-gpt can be used as a single line edge sensitive interrupt
+controller.  To do so, add the following properties to the gpt node:
+        interrupt-controller;
+        #interrupt-cells = <1>;
+When referencing the IRQ line from another node, the cell represents the
+sense mode; 1 for edge rising, 2 for edge falling.
+fsl,mpc5200-psc nodes
+---------------------
+The PSCs should include a cell-index which is the index of the PSC in
+hardware.  cell-index is used to determine which shared SoC registers to
+use when setting up PSC clocking.  cell-index number starts at '0'.  ie:
+        PSC1 has 'cell-index = <0>'
+        PSC4 has 'cell-index = <3>'
+PSC in i2s mode:  The mpc5200 and mpc5200b PSCs are not compatible when in
+i2s mode.  An 'mpc5200b-psc-i2s' node cannot include 'mpc5200-psc-i2s' in the
+compatible field.
+fsl,mpc5200-gpio and fsl,mpc5200-gpio-wkup nodes
+------------------------------------------------
+Each GPIO controller node should have the empty property gpio-controller and
+#gpio-cells set to 2. First cell is the GPIO number which is interpreted
+according to the bit numbers in the GPIO control registers. The second cell
+is for flags which is currently unused.
+fsl,mpc5200-fec nodes
+---------------------
+The FEC node can specify one of the following properties to configure
+the MII link:
+- fsl,7-wire-mode - An empty property that specifies the link uses 7-wire
+                    mode instead of MII
+- current-speed   - Specifies that the MII should be configured for a fixed
+                    speed.  This property should contain two cells.  The
+                    first cell specifies the speed in Mbps and the second
+                    should be '0' for half duplex and '1' for full duplex
+- phy-handle      - Contains a phandle to an Ethernet PHY.
+Interrupt controller (fsl,mpc5200-pic) node
+-------------------------------------------
+The mpc5200 pic binding splits hardware IRQ numbers into two levels.  The
+split reflects the layout of the PIC hardware itself, which groups
+interrupts into one of three groups; CRIT, MAIN or PERP.  Also, the
+Bestcomm dma engine has it's own set of interrupt sources which are
+cascaded off of peripheral interrupt 0, which the driver interprets as a
+fourth group, SDMA.
+The interrupts property for device nodes using the mpc5200 pic consists
+of three cells; <L1 L2 level>
+    L1 := [CRIT=0, MAIN=1, PERP=2, SDMA=3]
+    L2 := interrupt number; directly mapped from the value in the
+          "ICTL PerStat, MainStat, CritStat Encoded Register"
+    level := [LEVEL_HIGH=0, EDGE_RISING=1, EDGE_FALLING=2, LEVEL_LOW=3]
+For external IRQs, use the following interrupt property values (how to
+specify external interrupts is a frequently asked question):
+External interrupts:
+        external irq0:  interrupts = <0 0 n>;
+        external irq1:  interrupts = <1 1 n>;
+        external irq2:  interrupts = <1 2 n>;
+        external irq3:  interrupts = <1 3 n>;
+'n' is sense (0: level high, 1: edge rising, 2: edge falling 3: level low)
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f12f1c79c0c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,277 +0,0 @@
-MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
----------------------------
-(c) 2006-2007 Secret Lab Technologies Ltd
-Grant Likely <grant.likely at secretlab.ca>
-********** DRAFT ***********
-* WARNING: Do not depend on the stability of these bindings just yet.
-* The MPC5200 device tree conventions are still in flux
-* Keep an eye on the linuxppc-dev mailing list for more details
-********** DRAFT ***********
-I - Introduction
-================
-Boards supported by the arch/powerpc architecture require device tree be
-passed by the boot loader to the kernel at boot time.  The device tree
-describes what devices are present on the board and how they are
-connected.  The device tree can either be passed as a binary blob (as
-described in Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt), or passed
-by Open Firmware (IEEE 1275) compatible firmware using an OF compatible
-client interface API.
-This document specifies the requirements on the device-tree for mpc5200
-based boards.  These requirements are above and beyond the details
-specified in either the Open Firmware spec or booting-without-of.txt
-All new mpc5200-based boards are expected to match this document.  In
-cases where this document is not sufficient to support a new board port,
-this document should be updated as part of adding the new board support.
-II - Philosophy
-===============
-The core of this document is naming convention.  The whole point of
-defining this convention is to reduce or eliminate the number of
-special cases required to support a 5200 board.  If all 5200 boards
-follow the same convention, then generic 5200 support code will work
-rather than coding special cases for each new board.
-This section tries to capture the thought process behind why the naming
-convention is what it is.
-1.  names
---------
-There is strong convention/requirements already established for children
-of the root node.  'cpus' describes the processor cores, 'memory'
-describes memory, and 'chosen' provides boot configuration.  Other nodes
-are added to describe devices attached to the processor local bus.
-Following convention already established with other system-on-chip
-processors, 5200 device trees should use the name 'soc5200' for the
-parent node of on chip devices, and the root node should be its parent.
-Child nodes are typically named after the configured function.  ie.
-the FEC node is named 'ethernet', and a PSC in uart mode is named 'serial'.
-2. device_type property
-----------------------
-similar to the node name convention above; the device_type reflects the
-configured function of a device.  ie. 'serial' for a uart and 'spi' for
-an spi controller.  However, while node names *should* reflect the
-configured function, device_type *must* match the configured function
-exactly.
-3. compatible property
----------------------
-Since device_type isn't enough to match devices to drivers, there also
-needs to be a naming convention for the compatible property.  Compatible
-is an list of device descriptions sorted from specific to generic.  For
-the mpc5200, the required format for each compatible value is
-<chip>-<device>[-<mode>].  The OS should be able to match a device driver
-to the device based solely on the compatible value.  If two drivers
-match on the compatible list; the 'most compatible' driver should be
-selected.
-The split between the MPC5200 and the MPC5200B leaves a bit of a
-conundrum.  How should the compatible property be set up to provide
-maximum compatibility information; but still accurately describe the
-chip?  For the MPC5200; the answer is easy.  Most of the SoC devices
-originally appeared on the MPC5200.  Since they didn't exist anywhere
-else; the 5200 compatible properties will contain only one item;
-"mpc5200-<device>".
-The 5200B is almost the same as the 5200, but not quite.  It fixes
-silicon bugs and it adds a small number of enhancements.  Most of the
-devices either provide exactly the same interface as on the 5200.  A few
-devices have extra functions but still have a backwards compatible mode.
-To express this information as completely as possible, 5200B device trees
-should have two items in the compatible list;
-"mpc5200b-<device>\0mpc5200-<device>".  It is *strongly* recommended
-that 5200B device trees follow this convention (instead of only listing
-the base mpc5200 item).
-If another chip appear on the market with one of the mpc5200 SoC
-devices, then the compatible list should include mpc5200-<device>.
-ie. ethernet on mpc5200: compatible = "mpc5200-ethernet"
-    ethernet on mpc5200b: compatible = "mpc5200b-ethernet\0mpc5200-ethernet"
-Modal devices, like PSCs, also append the configured function to the
-end of the compatible field.  ie. A PSC in i2s mode would specify
-"mpc5200-psc-i2s", not "mpc5200-i2s".  This convention is chosen to
-avoid naming conflicts with non-psc devices providing the same
-function.  For example, "mpc5200-spi" and "mpc5200-psc-spi" describe
-the mpc5200 simple spi device and a PSC spi mode respectively.
-If the soc device is more generic and present on other SOCs, the
-compatible property can specify the more generic device type also.
-ie. mscan: compatible = "mpc5200-mscan\0fsl,mscan";
-At the time of writing, exact chip may be either 'mpc5200' or
-'mpc5200b'.
-Device drivers should always try to match as generically as possible.
-III - Structure
-===============
-The device tree for an mpc5200 board follows the structure defined in
-booting-without-of.txt with the following additional notes:
-0) the root node
----------------
-Typical root description node; see booting-without-of
-1) The cpus node
----------------
-The cpus node follows the basic layout described in booting-without-of.
-The bus-frequency property holds the XLB bus frequency
-The clock-frequency property holds the core frequency
-2) The memory node
------------------
-Typical memory description node; see booting-without-of.
-3) The soc5200 node
-------------------
-This node describes the on chip SOC peripherals.  Every mpc5200 based
-board will have this node, and as such there is a common naming
-convention for SOC devices.
-Required properties:
-name                    type            description
----                    ----            -----------
-device_type             string          must be "soc"
-ranges                  int             should be <0 baseaddr baseaddr+10000>
-reg                     int             must be <baseaddr 10000>
-compatible              string          mpc5200: "mpc5200-soc"
-                                        mpc5200b: "mpc5200b-soc\0mpc5200-soc"
-system-frequency        int             Fsystem frequency; source of all
-                                        other clocks.
-bus-frequency           int             IPB bus frequency in HZ.  Clock rate
-                                        used by most of the soc devices.
-#interrupt-cells        int             must be <3>.
-Recommended properties:
-name                    type            description
----                    ----            -----------
-model                   string          Exact model of the chip;
-                                        ie: model="fsl,mpc5200"
-revision                string          Silicon revision of chip
-                                        ie: revision="M08A"
-The 'model' and 'revision' properties are *strongly* recommended.  Having
-them presence acts as a bit of a safety net for working around as yet
-undiscovered bugs on one version of silicon.  For example, device drivers
-can use the model and revision properties to decide if a bug fix should
-be turned on.
-4) soc5200 child nodes
----------------------
-Any on chip SOC devices available to Linux must appear as soc5200 child nodes.
-Note: The tables below show the value for the mpc5200.  A mpc5200b device
-tree should use the "mpc5200b-<device>\0mpc5200-<device> form.
-Required soc5200 child nodes:
-name            device_type             compatible      Description
----            -----------             ----------      -----------
-cdm@<addr>      cdm                     mpc5200-cmd     Clock Distribution
-pic@<addr>      interrupt-controller    mpc5200-pic     need an interrupt
-                                                        controller to boot
-bestcomm@<addr> dma-controller          mpc5200-bestcomm 5200 pic also requires
-                                                         the bestcomm device
-Recommended soc5200 child nodes; populate as needed for your board
-name            device_type     compatible        Description
----            -----------     ----------        -----------
-gpt@<addr>      gpt             fsl,mpc5200-gpt   General purpose timers
-gpt@<addr>      gpt             fsl,mpc5200-gpt-gpio    General purpose
-                                                        timers in GPIO mode
-gpio@<addr>                     fsl,mpc5200-gpio        MPC5200 simple gpio
-                                                        controller
-gpio@<addr>                     fsl,mpc5200-gpio-wkup   MPC5200 wakeup gpio
-                                                        controller
-rtc@<addr>      rtc             mpc5200-rtc       Real time clock
-mscan@<addr>    mscan           mpc5200-mscan     CAN bus controller
-pci@<addr>      pci             mpc5200-pci       PCI bridge
-serial@<addr>   serial          mpc5200-psc-uart  PSC in serial mode
-i2s@<addr>      sound           mpc5200-psc-i2s   PSC in i2s mode
-ac97@<addr>     sound           mpc5200-psc-ac97  PSC in ac97 mode
-spi@<addr>      spi             mpc5200-psc-spi   PSC in spi mode
-irda@<addr>     irda            mpc5200-psc-irda  PSC in IrDA mode
-spi@<addr>      spi             mpc5200-spi       MPC5200 spi device
-ethernet@<addr> network         mpc5200-fec       MPC5200 ethernet device
-ata@<addr>      ata             mpc5200-ata       IDE ATA interface
-i2c@<addr>      i2c             mpc5200-i2c       I2C controller
-usb@<addr>      usb-ohci-be     mpc5200-ohci,ohci-be    USB controller
-xlb@<addr>      xlb             mpc5200-xlb       XLB arbitrator
-Important child node properties
-name            type            description
----            ----            -----------
-cell-index      int             When multiple devices are present, is the
-                                index of the device in the hardware (ie. There
-                                are 6 PSC on the 5200 numbered PSC1 to PSC6)
-                                    PSC1 has 'cell-index = <0>'
-                                    PSC4 has 'cell-index = <3>'
-5) General Purpose Timer nodes (child of soc5200 node)
-On the mpc5200 and 5200b, GPT0 has a watchdog timer function.  If the board
-design supports the internal wdt, then the device node for GPT0 should
-include the empty property 'fsl,has-wdt'.
-6) PSC nodes (child of soc5200 node)
-PSC nodes can define the optional 'port-number' property to force assignment
-order of serial ports.  For example, PSC5 might be physically connected to
-the port labeled 'COM1' and PSC1 wired to 'COM1'.  In this case, PSC5 would
-have a "port-number = <0>" property, and PSC1 would have "port-number = <1>".
-PSC in i2s mode:  The mpc5200 and mpc5200b PSCs are not compatible when in
-i2s mode.  An 'mpc5200b-psc-i2s' node cannot include 'mpc5200-psc-i2s' in the
-compatible field.
-7) GPIO controller nodes
-Each GPIO controller node should have the empty property gpio-controller and
-#gpio-cells set to 2. First cell is the GPIO number which is interpreted
-according to the bit numbers in the GPIO control registers. The second cell
-is for flags which is currently unsused.
-8) FEC nodes
-The FEC node can specify one of the following properties to configure
-the MII link:
-"fsl,7-wire-mode" - An empty property that specifies the link uses 7-wire
-                    mode instead of MII
-"current-speed"   - Specifies that the MII should be configured for a fixed
-                    speed.  This property should contain two cells.  The
-                    first cell specifies the speed in Mbps and the second
-                    should be '0' for half duplex and '1' for full duplex
-"phy-handle"      - Contains a phandle to an Ethernet PHY.
-IV - Extra Notes
-================
-1. Interrupt mapping
--------------------
-The mpc5200 pic driver splits hardware IRQ numbers into two levels.  The
-split reflects the layout of the PIC hardware itself, which groups
-interrupts into one of three groups; CRIT, MAIN or PERP.  Also, the
-Bestcomm dma engine has it's own set of interrupt sources which are
-cascaded off of peripheral interrupt 0, which the driver interprets as a
-fourth group, SDMA.
-The interrupts property for device nodes using the mpc5200 pic consists
-of three cells; <L1 L2 level>
-    L1 := [CRIT=0, MAIN=1, PERP=2, SDMA=3]
-    L2 := interrupt number; directly mapped from the value in the
-          "ICTL PerStat, MainStat, CritStat Encoded Register"
-    level := [LEVEL_HIGH=0, EDGE_RISING=1, EDGE_FALLING=2, LEVEL_LOW=3]
-2. Shared registers
-------------------
-Some SoC devices share registers between them.  ie. the i2c devices use
-a single clock control register, and almost all device are affected by
-the port_config register.  Devices which need to manipulate shared regs
-should look to the parent SoC node.  The soc node is responsible
-for arbitrating all shared register access.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
index d30a281c570f..10711d9f0788 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt
@@ -1402,7 +1402,7 @@ Syscalls are implemented on Linux for S390 by the Supervisor call instruction (S
 possibilities of these as the instruction is made up of a  0xA opcode & the second byte being
 the syscall number. They are traced using the simple command.
 TR SVC  <Optional value or range>
-the syscalls are defined in linux/include/asm-s390/unistd.h
+the syscalls are defined in linux/arch/s390/include/asm/unistd.h
 e.g. to trace all file opens just do
 TR SVC 5 ( as this is the syscall number of open )
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
index c4b7b2bd369a..480a78ef5a1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/cds.txt
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ platform. Some of the interface routines are specific to Linux/390 and some
 of them can be found on other Linux platforms implementations too.
 Miscellaneous function prototypes, data declarations, and macro definitions
 can be found in the architecture specific C header file
-linux/include/asm-s390/irq.h.
+linux/arch/s390/include/asm/irq.h.
 Overview of CDS interface concepts
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
index e05420973698..2d10053dd97e 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/s390dbf.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ S390 Debug Feature
 ==================
 files: arch/s390/kernel/debug.c
-       include/asm-s390/debug.h
+       arch/s390/include/asm/debug.h
 Description:
 ------------
diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
index 8398ca4ff4ed..6f33593e59e2 100644
--- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-design-CFS.txt
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ CPU bandwidth control purposes:
   This options needs CONFIG_CGROUPS to be defined, and lets the administrator
   create arbitrary groups of tasks, using the "cgroup" pseudo filesystem.  See
-   Documentation/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem.
+   Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt for more information about this filesystem.
 Only one of these options to group tasks can be chosen and not both.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
index ae3f962a7cfc..ff19a52fe004 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
@@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ Changes from 20040920 to 20041018
          I/O completion path a little more, especially taking care of
          fast-pathing the non-error case.  Also removes tons of dead
          members and defines from lpfc_scsi.h - e.g. lpfc_target is down
-          to nothing more then the lpfc_nodelist pointer.
+          to nothing more than the lpfc_nodelist pointer.
        * Added binary sysfs file to issue mbox commands
        * Replaced #if __BIG_ENDIAN with #if __BIG_ENDIAN_BITFIELD for
          compatibility with the user space applications.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx
index a9f721aeb11c..8b278c10edfd 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr)
 Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr)
        * version ncr53c8xx-3.4.1
-        - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC.
+        - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC.
        - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs.
 Sun Jul 09 16:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr)
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx
index ef985ec348e6..02ffbc1e8a84 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Sun Sep 24 21:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr)
 Wed Jul 26 23:30 2000 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr)
        * version sym53c8xx-1.7.1
-        - Provide OpenFirmare path through the proc FS on PPC.
+        - Provide OpenFirmware path through the proc FS on PPC.
        - Download of on-chip SRAM using memcpy_toio() doesn't work 
          on PPC. Restore previous method (MEMORY MOVE from SCRIPTS).
        - Remove trailing argument #2 from a couple of #undefs.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
index 38d324d62b25..e5b071d46619 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ Vport States:
      This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is
      independent of the adapter's link state.
    - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc.
-      This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization.
+      This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization.
  Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for
  Vport Creation.
@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ Vport Creation:
      This is equivalent to a driver "attach" on an adapter, which is
      independent of the adapter's link state.
    - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc.
-      This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization.
+      This is equivalent to a "link up" and successful link initialization.
  The LLDD's vport_create() function will not synchronously wait for both
  parts to be fully completed before returning. It must validate that the
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
index 4b7ac21ea9eb..0f5d26bea80f 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt
@@ -275,7 +275,8 @@ STAC9200
  dell-m25      Dell Inspiron E1505n
  dell-m26      Dell Inspiron 1501
  dell-m27      Dell Inspiron E1705/9400
-  gateway       Gateway laptops with EAPD control
+  gateway-m4    Gateway laptops with EAPD control
+  gateway-m4-2  Gateway laptops with EAPD control
  panasonic     Panasonic CF-74
 STAC9205/9254
@@ -302,6 +303,7 @@ STAC9220/9221
  macbook-pro   Intel Mac Book Pro 2nd generation (eq. type 3)
  imac-intel    Intel iMac (eq. type 2)
  imac-intel-20 Intel iMac (newer version) (eq. type 3)
+  ecs202        ECS/PC chips
  dell-d81      Dell (unknown)
  dell-d82      Dell (unknown)
  dell-m81      Dell (unknown)
@@ -310,9 +312,13 @@ STAC9220/9221
 STAC9202/9250/9251
 ==================
  ref           Reference board, base config
+  m1            Some Gateway MX series laptops (NX560XL)
+  m1-2          Some Gateway MX series laptops (MX6453)
+  m2            Some Gateway MX series laptops (M255)
  m2-2          Some Gateway MX series laptops
+  m3            Some Gateway MX series laptops
+  m5            Some Gateway MX series laptops (MP6954)
  m6            Some Gateway NX series laptops
-  pa6           Gateway NX860 series
 STAC9227/9228/9229/927x
 =======================
@@ -329,6 +335,7 @@ STAC92HD71B*
  dell-m4-1     Dell desktops
  dell-m4-2     Dell desktops
  dell-m4-3     Dell desktops
+  hp-m4         HP dv laptops
 STAC92HD73*
 ===========
@@ -337,10 +344,12 @@ STAC92HD73*
  dell-m6-amic  Dell desktops/laptops with analog mics
  dell-m6-dmic  Dell desktops/laptops with digital mics
  dell-m6       Dell desktops/laptops with both type of mics
+  dell-eq       Dell desktops/laptops
 STAC92HD83*
 ===========
  ref           Reference board
+  mic-ref       Reference board with power managment for ports
 STAC9872
 ========
diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp
index 154bd02220b9..34a9cfd746bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp
+++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp
@@ -13,10 +13,20 @@ Description
 This driver provides glue code connecting a National Semiconductor LM70 LLP
 temperature sensor evaluation board to the kernel's SPI core subsystem.
+This is a SPI master controller driver. It can be used in conjunction with
+(layered under) the LM70 logical driver (a "SPI protocol driver").
 In effect, this driver turns the parallel port interface on the eval board
 into a SPI bus with a single device, which will be driven by the generic
 LM70 driver (drivers/hwmon/lm70.c).
+Hardware Interfacing
+--------------------
+The schematic for this particular board (the LM70EVAL-LLP) is
+available (on page 4) here:
+  http://www.national.com/appinfo/tempsensors/files/LM70LLPEVALmanual.pdf
 The hardware interfacing on the LM70 LLP eval board is as follows:
   Parallel                 LM70 LLP
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index d79eeda7a699..3197fc83bc51 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
-Documentation for /proc/sys/vm/*        kernel version 2.2.10
+Documentation for /proc/sys/vm/*        kernel version 2.6.29
        (c) 1998, 1999,  Rik van Riel <riel@nl.linux.org>
+        (c) 2008         Peter W. Morreale <pmorreale@novell.com>
 For general info and legal blurb, please look in README.
 ==============================================================
 This file contains the documentation for the sysctl files in
-/proc/sys/vm and is valid for Linux kernel version 2.2.
+/proc/sys/vm and is valid for Linux kernel version 2.6.29.
 The files in this directory can be used to tune the operation
 of the virtual memory (VM) subsystem of the Linux kernel and
@@ -16,178 +17,274 @@ Default values and initialization routines for most of these
 files can be found in mm/swap.c.
 Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
- overcommit_memory
- page-cluster
+- block_dump
- dirty_ratio
+- dirty_background_bytes
 - dirty_background_ratio
+- dirty_bytes
 - dirty_expire_centisecs
+- dirty_ratio
 - dirty_writeback_centisecs
- highmem_is_dirtyable   (only if CONFIG_HIGHMEM set)
+- drop_caches
+- hugepages_treat_as_movable
+- hugetlb_shm_group
+- laptop_mode
+- legacy_va_layout
+- lowmem_reserve_ratio
 - max_map_count
 - min_free_kbytes
- laptop_mode
- block_dump
- drop-caches
- zone_reclaim_mode
- min_unmapped_ratio
 - min_slab_ratio
- panic_on_oom
+- min_unmapped_ratio
- oom_dump_tasks
+- mmap_min_addr
- oom_kill_allocating_task
- mmap_min_address
- numa_zonelist_order
 - nr_hugepages
 - nr_overcommit_hugepages
+- nr_pdflush_threads
+- nr_trim_pages         (only if CONFIG_MMU=n)
+- numa_zonelist_order
+- oom_dump_tasks
+- oom_kill_allocating_task
+- overcommit_memory
+- overcommit_ratio
+- page-cluster
+- panic_on_oom
+- percpu_pagelist_fraction
+- stat_interval
+- swappiness
+- vfs_cache_pressure
+- zone_reclaim_mode
 ==============================================================
-dirty_ratio, dirty_background_ratio, dirty_expire_centisecs,
+block_dump
-dirty_writeback_centisecs, highmem_is_dirtyable,
-vfs_cache_pressure, laptop_mode, block_dump, swap_token_timeout,
-drop-caches, hugepages_treat_as_movable:
-See Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
+information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
 ==============================================================
-overcommit_memory:
+dirty_background_bytes
-This value contains a flag that enables memory overcommitment.
+Contains the amount of dirty memory at which the pdflush background writeback
+daemon will start writeback.
-When this flag is 0, the kernel attempts to estimate the amount
+If dirty_background_bytes is written, dirty_background_ratio becomes a function
-of free memory left when userspace requests more memory.
+of its value (dirty_background_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory).
-When this flag is 1, the kernel pretends there is always enough
+==============================================================
-memory until it actually runs out.
-When this flag is 2, the kernel uses a "never overcommit"
+dirty_background_ratio
-policy that attempts to prevent any overcommit of memory.  
-This feature can be very useful because there are a lot of
+Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which
-programs that malloc() huge amounts of memory "just-in-case"
+the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writing out dirty data.
-and don't use much of it.
-The default value is 0.
+==============================================================
-See Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting and
+dirty_bytes
-security/commoncap.c::cap_vm_enough_memory() for more information.
+Contains the amount of dirty memory at which a process generating disk writes
+will itself start writeback.
+If dirty_bytes is written, dirty_ratio becomes a function of its value
+(dirty_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory).
 ==============================================================
-overcommit_ratio:
+dirty_expire_centisecs
-When overcommit_memory is set to 2, the committed address
+This tunable is used to define when dirty data is old enough to be eligible
-space is not permitted to exceed swap plus this percentage
+for writeout by the pdflush daemons.  It is expressed in 100'ths of a second.
-of physical RAM.  See above.
+Data which has been dirty in-memory for longer than this interval will be
+written out next time a pdflush daemon wakes up.
+==============================================================
+dirty_ratio
+Contains, as a percentage of total system memory, the number of pages at which
+a process which is generating disk writes will itself start writing out dirty
+data.
 ==============================================================
-page-cluster:
+dirty_writeback_centisecs
-The Linux VM subsystem avoids excessive disk seeks by reading
+The pdflush writeback daemons will periodically wake up and write `old' data
-multiple pages on a page fault. The number of pages it reads
+out to disk.  This tunable expresses the interval between those wakeups, in
-is dependent on the amount of memory in your machine.
+100'ths of a second.
-The number of pages the kernel reads in at once is equal to
+Setting this to zero disables periodic writeback altogether.
-2 ^ page-cluster. Values above 2 ^ 5 don't make much sense
-for swap because we only cluster swap data in 32-page groups.
 ==============================================================
-max_map_count:
+drop_caches
-This file contains the maximum number of memory map areas a process
+Writing to this will cause the kernel to drop clean caches, dentries and
-may have. Memory map areas are used as a side-effect of calling
+inodes from memory, causing that memory to become free.
-malloc, directly by mmap and mprotect, and also when loading shared
-libraries.
-While most applications need less than a thousand maps, certain
+To free pagecache:
-programs, particularly malloc debuggers, may consume lots of them,
+        echo 1 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-e.g., up to one or two maps per allocation.
+To free dentries and inodes:
+        echo 2 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
+To free pagecache, dentries and inodes:
+        echo 3 > /proc/sys/vm/drop_caches
-The default value is 65536.
+As this is a non-destructive operation and dirty objects are not freeable, the
+user should run `sync' first.
 ==============================================================
-min_free_kbytes:
+hugepages_treat_as_movable
-This is used to force the Linux VM to keep a minimum number 
+This parameter is only useful when kernelcore= is specified at boot time to
-of kilobytes free.  The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min
+create ZONE_MOVABLE for pages that may be reclaimed or migrated. Huge pages
-value for each lowmem zone in the system.  Each lowmem zone gets 
+are not movable so are not normally allocated from ZONE_MOVABLE. A non-zero
-a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size.
+value written to hugepages_treat_as_movable allows huge pages to be allocated
+from ZONE_MOVABLE.
-Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC
+Once enabled, the ZONE_MOVABLE is treated as an area of memory the huge
-allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will
+pages pool can easily grow or shrink within. Assuming that applications are
-become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads.
+not running that mlock() a lot of memory, it is likely the huge pages pool
+can grow to the size of ZONE_MOVABLE by repeatedly entering the desired value
-Setting this too high will OOM your machine instantly.
+into nr_hugepages and triggering page reclaim.
 ==============================================================
-percpu_pagelist_fraction
+hugetlb_shm_group
-This is the fraction of pages at most (high mark pcp->high) in each zone that
+hugetlb_shm_group contains group id that is allowed to create SysV
-are allocated for each per cpu page list.  The min value for this is 8.  It
+shared memory segment using hugetlb page.
-means that we don't allow more than 1/8th of pages in each zone to be
-allocated in any single per_cpu_pagelist.  This entry only changes the value
-of hot per cpu pagelists.  User can specify a number like 100 to allocate
-1/100th of each zone to each per cpu page list.
-The batch value of each per cpu pagelist is also updated as a result.  It is
+==============================================================
-set to pcp->high/4.  The upper limit of batch is (PAGE_SHIFT * 8)
-The initial value is zero.  Kernel does not use this value at boot time to set
+laptop_mode
-the high water marks for each per cpu page list.
-===============================================================
+laptop_mode is a knob that controls "laptop mode". All the things that are
+controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
-zone_reclaim_mode:
+==============================================================
-Zone_reclaim_mode allows someone to set more or less aggressive approaches to
+legacy_va_layout
-reclaim memory when a zone runs out of memory. If it is set to zero then no
-zone reclaim occurs. Allocations will be satisfied from other zones / nodes
-in the system.
-This is value ORed together of
+If non-zero, this sysctl disables the new 32-bit mmap mmap layout - the kernel
+will use the legacy (2.4) layout for all processes.
-1       = Zone reclaim on
+==============================================================
-2       = Zone reclaim writes dirty pages out
-4       = Zone reclaim swaps pages
-zone_reclaim_mode is set during bootup to 1 if it is determined that pages
+lowmem_reserve_ratio
-from remote zones will cause a measurable performance reduction. The
-page allocator will then reclaim easily reusable pages (those page
+For some specialised workloads on highmem machines it is dangerous for
-cache pages that are currently not used) before allocating off node pages.
+the kernel to allow process memory to be allocated from the "lowmem"
+zone.  This is because that memory could then be pinned via the mlock()
+system call, or by unavailability of swapspace.
+And on large highmem machines this lack of reclaimable lowmem memory
+can be fatal.
+So the Linux page allocator has a mechanism which prevents allocations
+which _could_ use highmem from using too much lowmem.  This means that
+a certain amount of lowmem is defended from the possibility of being
+captured into pinned user memory.
+(The same argument applies to the old 16 megabyte ISA DMA region.  This
+mechanism will also defend that region from allocations which could use
+highmem or lowmem).
+The `lowmem_reserve_ratio' tunable determines how aggressive the kernel is
+in defending these lower zones.
+If you have a machine which uses highmem or ISA DMA and your
+applications are using mlock(), or if you are running with no swap then
+you probably should change the lowmem_reserve_ratio setting.
+The lowmem_reserve_ratio is an array. You can see them by reading this file.
+-
+% cat /proc/sys/vm/lowmem_reserve_ratio
+256     256     32
+-
+Note: # of this elements is one fewer than number of zones. Because the highest
+      zone's value is not necessary for following calculation.
+But, these values are not used directly. The kernel calculates # of protection
+pages for each zones from them. These are shown as array of protection pages
+in /proc/zoneinfo like followings. (This is an example of x86-64 box).
+Each zone has an array of protection pages like this.
+-
+Node 0, zone      DMA
+  pages free     1355
+        min      3
+        low      3
+        high     4
+        :
+        :
+    numa_other   0
+        protection: (0, 2004, 2004, 2004)
+        ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+  pagesets
+    cpu: 0 pcp: 0
+        :
+-
+These protections are added to score to judge whether this zone should be used
+for page allocation or should be reclaimed.
+In this example, if normal pages (index=2) are required to this DMA zone and
+pages_high is used for watermark, the kernel judges this zone should not be
+used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
+(4 + 2004 = 2008). If this protection value is 0, this zone would be used for
+normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
+(=0) is used.
+zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
+(i < j):
+  zone[i]->protection[j]
+  = (total sums of present_pages from zone[i+1] to zone[j] on the node)
+    / lowmem_reserve_ratio[i];
+(i = j):
+   (should not be protected. = 0;
+(i > j):
+   (not necessary, but looks 0)
+The default values of lowmem_reserve_ratio[i] are
+    256 (if zone[i] means DMA or DMA32 zone)
+    32  (others).
+As above expression, they are reciprocal number of ratio.
+256 means 1/256. # of protection pages becomes about "0.39%" of total present
+pages of higher zones on the node.
+If you would like to protect more pages, smaller values are effective.
+The minimum value is 1 (1/1 -> 100%).
-It may be beneficial to switch off zone reclaim if the system is
+==============================================================
-used for a file server and all of memory should be used for caching files
-from disk. In that case the caching effect is more important than
-data locality.
-Allowing zone reclaim to write out pages stops processes that are
+max_map_count:
-writing large amounts of data from dirtying pages on other nodes. Zone
-reclaim will write out dirty pages if a zone fills up and so effectively
-throttle the process. This may decrease the performance of a single process
-since it cannot use all of system memory to buffer the outgoing writes
-anymore but it preserve the memory on other nodes so that the performance
-of other processes running on other nodes will not be affected.
-Allowing regular swap effectively restricts allocations to the local
+This file contains the maximum number of memory map areas a process
-node unless explicitly overridden by memory policies or cpuset
+may have. Memory map areas are used as a side-effect of calling
-configurations.
+malloc, directly by mmap and mprotect, and also when loading shared
+libraries.
-=============================================================
+While most applications need less than a thousand maps, certain
+programs, particularly malloc debuggers, may consume lots of them,
+e.g., up to one or two maps per allocation.
-min_unmapped_ratio:
+The default value is 65536.
-This is available only on NUMA kernels.
+==============================================================
-A percentage of the total pages in each zone.  Zone reclaim will only
+min_free_kbytes:
-occur if more than this percentage of pages are file backed and unmapped.
-This is to insure that a minimal amount of local pages is still available for
-file I/O even if the node is overallocated.
-The default is 1 percent.
+This is used to force the Linux VM to keep a minimum number
+of kilobytes free.  The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min
+value for each lowmem zone in the system.  Each lowmem zone gets
+a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size.
+Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC
+allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will
+become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads.
+Setting this too high will OOM your machine instantly.
 =============================================================
@@ -209,82 +306,73 @@ and may not be fast.
 =============================================================
-panic_on_oom
+min_unmapped_ratio:
-This enables or disables panic on out-of-memory feature.
+This is available only on NUMA kernels.
-If this is set to 0, the kernel will kill some rogue process,
+A percentage of the total pages in each zone.  Zone reclaim will only
-called oom_killer.  Usually, oom_killer can kill rogue processes and
+occur if more than this percentage of pages are file backed and unmapped.
-system will survive.
+This is to insure that a minimal amount of local pages is still available for
+file I/O even if the node is overallocated.
-If this is set to 1, the kernel panics when out-of-memory happens.
+The default is 1 percent.
-However, if a process limits using nodes by mempolicy/cpusets,
-and those nodes become memory exhaustion status, one process
-may be killed by oom-killer. No panic occurs in this case.
-Because other nodes' memory may be free. This means system total status
-may be not fatal yet.
-If this is set to 2, the kernel panics compulsorily even on the
+==============================================================
-above-mentioned.
-The default value is 0.
+mmap_min_addr
-1 and 2 are for failover of clustering. Please select either
-according to your policy of failover.
-=============================================================
+This file indicates the amount of address space  which a user process will
+be restricted from mmaping.  Since kernel null dereference bugs could
+accidentally operate based on the information in the first couple of pages
+of memory userspace processes should not be allowed to write to them.  By
+default this value is set to 0 and no protections will be enforced by the
+security module.  Setting this value to something like 64k will allow the
+vast majority of applications to work correctly and provide defense in depth
+against future potential kernel bugs.
-oom_dump_tasks
+==============================================================
-Enables a system-wide task dump (excluding kernel threads) to be
+nr_hugepages
-produced when the kernel performs an OOM-killing and includes such
-information as pid, uid, tgid, vm size, rss, cpu, oom_adj score, and
-name.  This is helpful to determine why the OOM killer was invoked
-and to identify the rogue task that caused it.
-If this is set to zero, this information is suppressed.  On very
+Change the minimum size of the hugepage pool.
-large systems with thousands of tasks it may not be feasible to dump
-the memory state information for each one.  Such systems should not
-be forced to incur a performance penalty in OOM conditions when the
-information may not be desired.
-If this is set to non-zero, this information is shown whenever the
+See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
-OOM killer actually kills a memory-hogging task.
-The default value is 0.
+==============================================================
-=============================================================
+nr_overcommit_hugepages
-oom_kill_allocating_task
+Change the maximum size of the hugepage pool. The maximum is
+nr_hugepages + nr_overcommit_hugepages.
-This enables or disables killing the OOM-triggering task in
+See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
-out-of-memory situations.
-If this is set to zero, the OOM killer will scan through the entire
+==============================================================
-tasklist and select a task based on heuristics to kill.  This normally
-selects a rogue memory-hogging task that frees up a large amount of
-memory when killed.
-If this is set to non-zero, the OOM killer simply kills the task that
+nr_pdflush_threads
-triggered the out-of-memory condition.  This avoids the expensive
-tasklist scan.
-If panic_on_oom is selected, it takes precedence over whatever value
+The current number of pdflush threads.  This value is read-only.
-is used in oom_kill_allocating_task.
+The value changes according to the number of dirty pages in the system.
-The default value is 0.
+When neccessary, additional pdflush threads are created, one per second, up to
+nr_pdflush_threads_max.
 ==============================================================
-mmap_min_addr
+nr_trim_pages
-This file indicates the amount of address space  which a user process will
+This is available only on NOMMU kernels.
-be restricted from mmaping.  Since kernel null dereference bugs could
-accidentally operate based on the information in the first couple of pages
+This value adjusts the excess page trimming behaviour of power-of-2 aligned
-of memory userspace processes should not be allowed to write to them.  By
+NOMMU mmap allocations.
-default this value is set to 0 and no protections will be enforced by the
-security module.  Setting this value to something like 64k will allow the
+A value of 0 disables trimming of allocations entirely, while a value of 1
-vast majority of applications to work correctly and provide defense in depth
+trims excess pages aggressively. Any value >= 1 acts as the watermark where
-against future potential kernel bugs.
+trimming of allocations is initiated.
+The default value is 1.
+See Documentation/nommu-mmap.txt for more information.
 ==============================================================
@@ -333,17 +421,199 @@ this is causing problems for your system/application.
 ==============================================================
-nr_hugepages
+oom_dump_tasks
-Change the minimum size of the hugepage pool.
+Enables a system-wide task dump (excluding kernel threads) to be
+produced when the kernel performs an OOM-killing and includes such
+information as pid, uid, tgid, vm size, rss, cpu, oom_adj score, and
+name.  This is helpful to determine why the OOM killer was invoked
+and to identify the rogue task that caused it.
-See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+If this is set to zero, this information is suppressed.  On very
+large systems with thousands of tasks it may not be feasible to dump
+the memory state information for each one.  Such systems should not
+be forced to incur a performance penalty in OOM conditions when the
+information may not be desired.
+If this is set to non-zero, this information is shown whenever the
+OOM killer actually kills a memory-hogging task.
+The default value is 0.
 ==============================================================
-nr_overcommit_hugepages
+oom_kill_allocating_task
-Change the maximum size of the hugepage pool. The maximum is
+This enables or disables killing the OOM-triggering task in
-nr_hugepages + nr_overcommit_hugepages.
+out-of-memory situations.
-See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+If this is set to zero, the OOM killer will scan through the entire
+tasklist and select a task based on heuristics to kill.  This normally
+selects a rogue memory-hogging task that frees up a large amount of
+memory when killed.
+If this is set to non-zero, the OOM killer simply kills the task that
+triggered the out-of-memory condition.  This avoids the expensive
+tasklist scan.
+If panic_on_oom is selected, it takes precedence over whatever value
+is used in oom_kill_allocating_task.
+The default value is 0.
+==============================================================
+overcommit_memory:
+This value contains a flag that enables memory overcommitment.
+When this flag is 0, the kernel attempts to estimate the amount
+of free memory left when userspace requests more memory.
+When this flag is 1, the kernel pretends there is always enough
+memory until it actually runs out.
+When this flag is 2, the kernel uses a "never overcommit"
+policy that attempts to prevent any overcommit of memory.
+This feature can be very useful because there are a lot of
+programs that malloc() huge amounts of memory "just-in-case"
+and don't use much of it.
+The default value is 0.
+See Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting and
+security/commoncap.c::cap_vm_enough_memory() for more information.
+==============================================================
+overcommit_ratio:
+When overcommit_memory is set to 2, the committed address
+space is not permitted to exceed swap plus this percentage
+of physical RAM.  See above.
+==============================================================
+page-cluster
+page-cluster controls the number of pages which are written to swap in
+a single attempt.  The swap I/O size.
+It is a logarithmic value - setting it to zero means "1 page", setting
+it to 1 means "2 pages", setting it to 2 means "4 pages", etc.
+The default value is three (eight pages at a time).  There may be some
+small benefits in tuning this to a different value if your workload is
+swap-intensive.
+=============================================================
+panic_on_oom
+This enables or disables panic on out-of-memory feature.
+If this is set to 0, the kernel will kill some rogue process,
+called oom_killer.  Usually, oom_killer can kill rogue processes and
+system will survive.
+If this is set to 1, the kernel panics when out-of-memory happens.
+However, if a process limits using nodes by mempolicy/cpusets,
+and those nodes become memory exhaustion status, one process
+may be killed by oom-killer. No panic occurs in this case.
+Because other nodes' memory may be free. This means system total status
+may be not fatal yet.
+If this is set to 2, the kernel panics compulsorily even on the
+above-mentioned.
+The default value is 0.
+1 and 2 are for failover of clustering. Please select either
+according to your policy of failover.
+=============================================================
+percpu_pagelist_fraction
+This is the fraction of pages at most (high mark pcp->high) in each zone that
+are allocated for each per cpu page list.  The min value for this is 8.  It
+means that we don't allow more than 1/8th of pages in each zone to be
+allocated in any single per_cpu_pagelist.  This entry only changes the value
+of hot per cpu pagelists.  User can specify a number like 100 to allocate
+1/100th of each zone to each per cpu page list.
+The batch value of each per cpu pagelist is also updated as a result.  It is
+set to pcp->high/4.  The upper limit of batch is (PAGE_SHIFT * 8)
+The initial value is zero.  Kernel does not use this value at boot time to set
+the high water marks for each per cpu page list.
+==============================================================
+stat_interval
+The time interval between which vm statistics are updated.  The default
+is 1 second.
+==============================================================
+swappiness
+This control is used to define how aggressive the kernel will swap
+memory pages.  Higher values will increase agressiveness, lower values
+descrease the amount of swap.
+The default value is 60.
+==============================================================
+vfs_cache_pressure
+------------------
+Controls the tendency of the kernel to reclaim the memory which is used for
+caching of directory and inode objects.
+At the default value of vfs_cache_pressure=100 the kernel will attempt to
+reclaim dentries and inodes at a "fair" rate with respect to pagecache and
+swapcache reclaim.  Decreasing vfs_cache_pressure causes the kernel to prefer
+to retain dentry and inode caches.  Increasing vfs_cache_pressure beyond 100
+causes the kernel to prefer to reclaim dentries and inodes.
+==============================================================
+zone_reclaim_mode:
+Zone_reclaim_mode allows someone to set more or less aggressive approaches to
+reclaim memory when a zone runs out of memory. If it is set to zero then no
+zone reclaim occurs. Allocations will be satisfied from other zones / nodes
+in the system.
+This is value ORed together of
+1       = Zone reclaim on
+2       = Zone reclaim writes dirty pages out
+4       = Zone reclaim swaps pages
+zone_reclaim_mode is set during bootup to 1 if it is determined that pages
+from remote zones will cause a measurable performance reduction. The
+page allocator will then reclaim easily reusable pages (those page
+cache pages that are currently not used) before allocating off node pages.
+It may be beneficial to switch off zone reclaim if the system is
+used for a file server and all of memory should be used for caching files
+from disk. In that case the caching effect is more important than
+data locality.
+Allowing zone reclaim to write out pages stops processes that are
+writing large amounts of data from dirtying pages on other nodes. Zone
+reclaim will write out dirty pages if a zone fills up and so effectively
+throttle the process. This may decrease the performance of a single process
+since it cannot use all of system memory to buffer the outgoing writes
+anymore but it preserve the memory on other nodes so that the performance
+of other processes running on other nodes will not be affected.
+Allowing regular swap effectively restricts allocations to the local
+node unless explicitly overridden by memory policies or cpuset
+configurations.
+============ End of Document =================================
diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
index 10a0263ebb3f..9e592c718afb 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,5 @@
 Linux Magic System Request Key Hacks
 Documentation for sysrq.c
-Last update: 2007-AUG-04
 *  What is the magic SysRq key?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -211,6 +210,24 @@ within a function called by handle_sysrq, you must be aware that you are in
 a lock (you are also in an interrupt handler, which means don't sleep!), so
 you must call __handle_sysrq_nolock instead.
+*  When I hit a SysRq key combination only the header appears on the console?
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Sysrq output is subject to the same console loglevel control as all
+other console output.  This means that if the kernel was booted 'quiet'
+as is common on distro kernels the output may not appear on the actual
+console, even though it will appear in the dmesg buffer, and be accessible
+via the dmesg command and to the consumers of /proc/kmsg.  As a specific
+exception the header line from the sysrq command is passed to all console
+consumers as if the current loglevel was maximum.  If only the header
+is emitted it is almost certain that the kernel loglevel is too low.
+Should you require the output on the console channel then you will need
+to temporarily up the console loglevel using alt-sysrq-8 or:
+    echo 8 > /proc/sysrq-trigger
+Remember to return the loglevel to normal after triggering the sysrq
+command you are interested in.
 *  I have more questions, who can I ask?
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 And I'll answer any questions about the registration system you got, also
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt
index e8b50b7de9d9..cfdcd16e3abf 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/dma.txt
@@ -6,8 +6,9 @@ in the kernel usb programming guide (kerneldoc, from the source code).
 API OVERVIEW
 The big picture is that USB drivers can continue to ignore most DMA issues,
-though they still must provide DMA-ready buffers (see DMA-mapping.txt).
+though they still must provide DMA-ready buffers (see
-That's how they've worked through the 2.4 (and earlier) kernels.
+Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt).  That's how they've worked through
+the 2.4 (and earlier) kernels.
 OR:  they can now be DMA-aware.
@@ -62,8 +63,8 @@ and effects like cache-trashing can impose subtle penalties.
  force a consistent memory access ordering by using memory barriers.  It's
  not using a streaming DMA mapping, so it's good for small transfers on
  systems where the I/O would otherwise thrash an IOMMU mapping.  (See
-  Documentation/DMA-mapping.txt for definitions of "coherent" and "streaming"
+  Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt for definitions of "coherent" and
-  DMA mappings.)
+  "streaming" DMA mappings.)
  Asking for 1/Nth of a page (as well as asking for N pages) is reasonably
  space-efficient.
@@ -93,7 +94,7 @@ WORKING WITH EXISTING BUFFERS
 Existing buffers aren't usable for DMA without first being mapped into the
 DMA address space of the device.  However, most buffers passed to your
 driver can safely be used with such DMA mapping.  (See the first section
-of DMA-mapping.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?")
+of Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt, titled "What memory is DMA-able?")
 - When you're using scatterlists, you can map everything at once.  On some
  systems, this kicks in an IOMMU and turns the scatterlists into single
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index e48ea1d51010..ad642615ad4c 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -313,11 +313,13 @@ three of the methods listed above.  In addition, a driver indicates
 that it supports autosuspend by setting the .supports_autosuspend flag
 in its usb_driver structure.  It is then responsible for informing the
 USB core whenever one of its interfaces becomes busy or idle.  The
-driver does so by calling these three functions:
+driver does so by calling these five functions:
        int  usb_autopm_get_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
        void usb_autopm_put_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
        int  usb_autopm_set_interface(struct usb_interface *intf);
+        int  usb_autopm_get_interface_async(struct usb_interface *intf);
+        void usb_autopm_put_interface_async(struct usb_interface *intf);
 The functions work by maintaining a counter in the usb_interface
 structure.  When intf->pm_usage_count is > 0 then the interface is
@@ -330,10 +332,12 @@ associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces.
 This field is used only by the USB core.)
 The driver owns intf->pm_usage_count; it can modify the value however
-and whenever it likes.  A nice aspect of the usb_autopm_* routines is
+and whenever it likes.  A nice aspect of the non-async usb_autopm_*
-that the changes they make are protected by the usb_device structure's
+routines is that the changes they make are protected by the usb_device
-PM mutex (udev->pm_mutex); however drivers may change pm_usage_count
+structure's PM mutex (udev->pm_mutex); however drivers may change
-without holding the mutex.
+pm_usage_count without holding the mutex.  Drivers using the async
+routines are responsible for their own synchronization and mutual
+exclusion.
        usb_autopm_get_interface() increments pm_usage_count and
        attempts an autoresume if the new value is > 0 and the
@@ -348,6 +352,14 @@ without holding the mutex.
        is suspended, and it attempts an autosuspend if the value is
        <= 0 and the device isn't suspended.
+        usb_autopm_get_interface_async() and
+        usb_autopm_put_interface_async() do almost the same things as
+        their non-async counterparts.  The differences are: they do
+        not acquire the PM mutex, and they use a workqueue to do their
+        jobs.  As a result they can be called in an atomic context,
+        such as an URB's completion handler, but when they return the
+        device will not generally not yet be in the desired state.
 There also are a couple of utility routines drivers can use:
        usb_autopm_enable() sets pm_usage_cnt to 0 and then calls
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
index 2e78b70f3adc..426ddaaef96f 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
+++ b/Documentation/usb/wusb-cbaf
@@ -80,12 +80,6 @@ case $1 in
    start)
        for dev in ${2:-$hdevs}
          do
-          uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc)
-          if cat $uwb_rc/beacon | grep -q -- "-1"
-              then
-              echo 13 0 > $uwb_rc/beacon
-              echo I: started beaconing on ch 13 on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2
-          fi
          echo $host_CHID > $dev/wusb_chid
          echo I: started host $(basename $dev) >&2
        done
@@ -95,9 +89,6 @@ case $1 in
          do
          echo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 > $dev/wusb_chid
          echo I: stopped host $(basename $dev) >&2
-          uwb_rc=$(readlink -f $dev/uwb_rc)
-          echo -1 | cat > $uwb_rc/beacon
-          echo I: stopped beaconing on $(basename $uwb_rc) >&2
        done
        ;;
    set-chid)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index 335aef4dcaeb..b8d470596b0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -152,3 +152,4 @@
 151 -> ADS Tech Instant HDTV                    [1421:0380]
 152 -> Asus Tiger Rev:1.00                      [1043:4857]
 153 -> Kworld Plus TV Analog Lite PCI           [17de:7128]
+154 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM Plus          [1461:f31d]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
index 11c5fd22a332..49679e6aaa76 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/si470x.txt
@@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ chips are known to work:
 - 10c4:818a: Silicon Labs USB FM Radio Reference Design
 - 06e1:a155: ADS/Tech FM Radio Receiver (formerly Instant FM Music) (RDX-155-EF)
 - 1b80:d700: KWorld USB FM Radio SnapMusic Mobile 700 (FM700)
+- 10c5:819a: DealExtreme USB Radio
 Software
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
index eeae76c22a93..ff124374e9ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ may be NULL if the subdev driver does not support anything from that category.
 It looks like this:
 struct v4l2_subdev_core_ops {
-        int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_chip_ident *chip);
+        int (*g_chip_ident)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, struct v4l2_dbg_chip_ident *chip);
        int (*log_status)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd);
        int (*init)(struct v4l2_subdev *sd, u32 val);
        ...
@@ -390,16 +390,18 @@ allocated memory.
 You should also set these fields:
- parent: set to the parent device (same device as was used to register
+- v4l2_dev: set to the v4l2_device parent device.
-  v4l2_device).
 - name: set to something descriptive and unique.
- fops: set to the file_operations struct.
+- fops: set to the v4l2_file_operations struct.
 - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance
  (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the
  future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct.
-If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set .unlocked_ioctl to
+If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set either .unlocked_ioctl or
-__video_ioctl2 or .ioctl to video_ioctl2 in your file_operations struct.
+.ioctl to video_ioctl2 in your v4l2_file_operations struct.
+The v4l2_file_operations struct is a subset of file_operations. The main
+difference is that the inode argument is omitted since it is never used.
 video_device registration
@@ -410,7 +412,7 @@ for you.
        err = video_register_device(vdev, VFL_TYPE_GRABBER, -1);
        if (err) {
-                video_device_release(vdev); // or kfree(my_vdev);
+                video_device_release(vdev); /* or kfree(my_vdev); */
                return err;
        }
@@ -516,5 +518,4 @@ void *video_drvdata(struct file *file);
 You can go from a video_device struct to the v4l2_device struct using:
-struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = dev_get_drvdata(vdev->parent);
+struct v4l2_device *v4l2_dev = vdev->v4l2_dev;
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c b/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c
index 079b628481cf..d6e70bef8ad0 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c
@@ -4,12 +4,21 @@
 *
 *      Compile with:
 *              gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab
- *      Use as:
+ *      Use as:
- *              v4lgrab >image.ppm
+ *              v4lgrab >image.ppm
 *
 *      Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org>
- *      Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c
+ *      Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c
- *      with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu).
+ *      with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu).
+ *
+ *
+ *      For some cameras you may need to pre-load libv4l to perform
+ *      the necessary decompression, e.g.:
+ *
+ *      export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libv4l/v4l1compat.so
+ *      ./v4lgrab >image.ppm
+ *
+ *      see http://hansdegoede.livejournal.com/3636.html for details.
 *
 */
@@ -24,7 +33,7 @@
 #include <linux/types.h>
 #include <linux/videodev.h>
-#define FILE "/dev/video0"
+#define VIDEO_DEV "/dev/video0"
 /* Stole this from tvset.c */
@@ -90,7 +99,7 @@ int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) {
 int main(int argc, char ** argv)
 {
-  int fd = open(FILE, O_RDONLY), f;
+  int fd = open(VIDEO_DEV, O_RDONLY), f;
  struct video_capability cap;
  struct video_window win;
  struct video_picture vpic;
@@ -100,13 +109,13 @@ int main(int argc, char ** argv)
  unsigned int i, src_depth;
  if (fd < 0) {
-    perror(FILE);
+    perror(VIDEO_DEV);
    exit(1);
  }
  if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) {
    perror("VIDIOGCAP");
-    fprintf(stderr, "(" FILE " not a video4linux device?)\n");
+    fprintf(stderr, "(" VIDEO_DEV " not a video4linux device?)\n");
    close(fd);
    exit(1);
  }
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
index 125eed560e5a..0706a7282a8c 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
@@ -137,13 +137,6 @@ shrink_page_list() where they will be detected when vmscan walks the reverse
 map in try_to_unmap().  If try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, shrink_page_list()
 will cull the page at that point.
-Note that for anonymous pages, shrink_page_list() attempts to add the page to
-the swap cache before it tries to unmap the page.  To avoid this unnecessary
-consumption of swap space, shrink_page_list() calls try_to_munlock() to check
-whether any VM_LOCKED vmas map the page without attempting to unmap the page.
-If try_to_munlock() returns SWAP_MLOCK, shrink_page_list() will cull the page
-without consuming swap space.  try_to_munlock() will be described below.
 To "cull" an unevictable page, vmscan simply puts the page back on the lru
 list using putback_lru_page()--the inverse operation to isolate_lru_page()--
 after dropping the page lock.  Because the condition which makes the page
@@ -190,8 +183,8 @@ several places:
   in the VM_LOCKED flag being set for the vma.
 3) in the fault path, if mlocked pages are "culled" in the fault path,
   and when a VM_LOCKED stack segment is expanded.
-4) as mentioned above, in vmscan:shrink_page_list() with attempting to
+4) as mentioned above, in vmscan:shrink_page_list() when attempting to
-   reclaim a page in a VM_LOCKED vma--via try_to_unmap() or try_to_munlock().
+   reclaim a page in a VM_LOCKED vma via try_to_unmap().
 Mlocked pages become unlocked and rescued from the unevictable list when:
@@ -260,9 +253,9 @@ mlock_fixup() filters several classes of "special" vmas:
 2) vmas mapping hugetlbfs page are already effectively pinned into memory.
   We don't need nor want to mlock() these pages.  However, to preserve the
-   prior behavior of mlock()--before the unevictable/mlock changes--mlock_fixup()
+   prior behavior of mlock()--before the unevictable/mlock changes--
-   will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs vma range to allocate the
+   mlock_fixup() will call make_pages_present() in the hugetlbfs vma range
-   huge pages and populate the ptes.
+   to allocate the huge pages and populate the ptes.
 3) vmas with VM_DONTEXPAND|VM_RESERVED are generally user space mappings of
   kernel pages, such as the vdso page, relay channel pages, etc.  These pages
@@ -322,7 +315,7 @@ __mlock_vma_pages_range()--the same function used to mlock a vma range--
 passing a flag to indicate that munlock() is being performed.
 Because the vma access protections could have been changed to PROT_NONE after
-faulting in and mlocking some pages, get_user_pages() was unreliable for visiting
+faulting in and mlocking pages, get_user_pages() was unreliable for visiting
 these pages for munlocking.  Because we don't want to leave pages mlocked(),
 get_user_pages() was enhanced to accept a flag to ignore the permissions when
 fetching the pages--all of which should be resident as a result of previous
@@ -416,8 +409,8 @@ Mlocked Pages:  munmap()/exit()/exec() System Call Handling
 When unmapping an mlocked region of memory, whether by an explicit call to
 munmap() or via an internal unmap from exit() or exec() processing, we must
 munlock the pages if we're removing the last VM_LOCKED vma that maps the pages.
-Before the unevictable/mlock changes, mlocking did not mark the pages in any way,
+Before the unevictable/mlock changes, mlocking did not mark the pages in any
-so unmapping them required no processing.
+way, so unmapping them required no processing.
 To munlock a range of memory under the unevictable/mlock infrastructure, the
 munmap() hander and task address space tear down function call
@@ -517,12 +510,10 @@ couldn't be mlocked.
 Mlocked pages:  try_to_munlock() Reverse Map Scan
 TODO/FIXME:  a better name might be page_mlocked()--analogous to the
-page_referenced() reverse map walker--especially if we continue to call this
+page_referenced() reverse map walker.
-from shrink_page_list().  See related TODO/FIXME below.
-When munlock_vma_page()--see "Mlocked Pages:  munlock()/munlockall() System
+When munlock_vma_page()--see "Mlocked Pages:  munlock()/munlockall()
-Call Handling" above--tries to munlock a page, or when shrink_page_list()
+System Call Handling" above--tries to munlock a page, it needs to
-encounters an anonymous page that is not yet in the swap cache, they need to
 determine whether or not the page is mapped by any VM_LOCKED vma, without
 actually attempting to unmap all ptes from the page.  For this purpose, the
 unevictable/mlock infrastructure introduced a variant of try_to_unmap() called
@@ -535,10 +526,7 @@ for VM_LOCKED vmas.  When such a vma is found for anonymous pages and file
 pages mapped in linear VMAs, as in the try_to_unmap() case, the functions
 attempt to acquire the associated mmap semphore, mlock the page via
 mlock_vma_page() and return SWAP_MLOCK.  This effectively undoes the
-pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page() and informs
+pre-clearing of the page's PG_mlocked done by munlock_vma_page.
-shrink_page_list() that the anonymous page should be culled rather than added
-to the swap cache in preparation for a try_to_unmap() that will almost
-certainly fail.
 If try_to_unmap() is unable to acquire a VM_LOCKED vma's associated mmap
 semaphore, it will return SWAP_AGAIN.  This will allow shrink_page_list()
@@ -557,10 +545,7 @@ However, the scan can terminate when it encounters a VM_LOCKED vma and can
 successfully acquire the vma's mmap semphore for read and mlock the page.
 Although try_to_munlock() can be called many [very many!] times when
 munlock()ing a large region or tearing down a large address space that has been
-mlocked via mlockall(), overall this is a fairly rare event.  In addition,
+mlocked via mlockall(), overall this is a fairly rare event.
-although shrink_page_list() calls try_to_munlock() for every anonymous page that
-it handles that is not yet in the swap cache, on average anonymous pages will
-have very short reverse map lists.
 Mlocked Page:  Page Reclaim in shrink_*_list()
@@ -588,8 +573,8 @@ Some examples of these unevictable pages on the LRU lists are:
   munlock_vma_page() was forced to let the page back on to the normal
   LRU list for vmscan to handle.
-shrink_inactive_list() also culls any unevictable pages that it finds
+shrink_inactive_list() also culls any unevictable pages that it finds on
-on the inactive lists, again diverting them to the appropriate zone's unevictable
+the inactive lists, again diverting them to the appropriate zone's unevictable
 lru list.  shrink_inactive_list() should only see SHM_LOCKed pages that became
 SHM_LOCKed after shrink_active_list() had moved them to the inactive list, or
 pages mapped into VM_LOCKED vmas that munlock_vma_page() couldn't isolate from
@@ -597,19 +582,7 @@ the lru to recheck via try_to_munlock().  shrink_inactive_list() won't notice
 the latter, but will pass on to shrink_page_list().
 shrink_page_list() again culls obviously unevictable pages that it could
-encounter for similar reason to shrink_inactive_list().  As already discussed,
+encounter for similar reason to shrink_inactive_list().  Pages mapped into
-shrink_page_list() proactively looks for anonymous pages that should have
-PG_mlocked set but don't--these would not be detected by page_evictable()--to
-avoid adding them to the swap cache unnecessarily.  File pages mapped into
 VM_LOCKED vmas but without PG_mlocked set will make it all the way to
-try_to_unmap().  shrink_page_list() will divert them to the unevictable list when
+try_to_unmap().  shrink_page_list() will divert them to the unevictable list
-try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, as discussed above.
+when try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK, as discussed above.
-TODO/FIXME:  If we can enhance the swap cache to reliably remove entries
-with page_count(page) > 2, as long as all ptes are mapped to the page and
-not the swap entry, we can probably remove the call to try_to_munlock() in
-shrink_page_list() and just remove the page from the swap cache when
-try_to_unmap() returns SWAP_MLOCK.   Currently, remove_exclusive_swap_page()
-doesn't seem to allow that.
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX b/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX
index 7b0ceaaad7af..d63fa024ac05 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/00-INDEX
@@ -4,5 +4,7 @@ ds2482
        - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor DS2482 provides 1-wire busses.
 ds2490
        - The Maxim/Dallas Semiconductor DS2490 builds USB <-> W1 bridges.
+mxc_w1
+        - W1 master controller driver found on Freescale MX2/MX3 SoCs
 w1-gpio
        - GPIO 1-wire bus master driver.
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1 b/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..97f6199a7f39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/mxc-w1
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Kernel driver mxc_w1
+====================
+Supported chips:
+  * Freescale MX27, MX31 and probably other i.MX SoCs
+    Datasheets:
+        http://www.freescale.com/files/32bit/doc/data_sheet/MCIMX31.pdf?fpsp=1
+        http://www.freescale.com/files/dsp/MCIMX27.pdf?fpsp=1
+Author: Originally based on Freescale code, prepared for mainline by
+        Sascha Hauer <s.hauer@pengutronix.de>
diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink
index 3640c7c87d45..804445f745ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink
+++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink
@@ -5,69 +5,157 @@ Message types.
 =============
 There are three types of messages between w1 core and userspace:
-1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device found
+1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device
-        either due to automatic or requested search.
+        found either due to automatic or requested search.
-2. Userspace commands. Includes read/write and search/alarm search comamnds.
+2. Userspace commands.
 3. Replies to userspace commands.
 Protocol.
 ========
-[struct cn_msg] - connector header. It's length field is equal to size of the attached data.
+[struct cn_msg] - connector header.
+        Its length field is equal to size of the attached data
 [struct w1_netlink_msg] - w1 netlink header.
        __u8 type       - message type.
-                        W1_SLAVE_ADD/W1_SLAVE_REMOVE - slave add/remove events.
+                        W1_LIST_MASTERS
-                        W1_MASTER_ADD/W1_MASTER_REMOVE - master add/remove events.
+                                list current bus masters
-                        W1_MASTER_CMD - userspace command for bus master device (search/alarm search).
+                        W1_SLAVE_ADD/W1_SLAVE_REMOVE
-                        W1_SLAVE_CMD - userspace command for slave device (read/write/ search/alarm search
+                                slave add/remove events
-                                        for bus master device where given slave device found).
+                        W1_MASTER_ADD/W1_MASTER_REMOVE
+                                master add/remove events
+                        W1_MASTER_CMD
+                                userspace command for bus master
+                                device (search/alarm search)
+                        W1_SLAVE_CMD
+                                userspace command for slave device
+                                (read/write/touch)
        __u8 res        - reserved
-        __u16 len       - size of attached to this header data.
+        __u16 len       - size of data attached to this header data
        union {
-                __u8 id;                         - slave unique device id
+                __u8 id[8];                      - slave unique device id
                struct w1_mst {
-                        __u32           id;      - master's id.
+                        __u32           id;      - master's id
                        __u32           res;     - reserved
                } mst;
        } id;
-[strucrt w1_netlink_cmd] - command for gived master or slave device.
+[struct w1_netlink_cmd] - command for given master or slave device.
        __u8 cmd        - command opcode.
-                        W1_CMD_READ     - read command.
+                        W1_CMD_READ     - read command
-                        W1_CMD_WRITE    - write command.
+                        W1_CMD_WRITE    - write command
-                        W1_CMD_SEARCH   - search command.
+                        W1_CMD_TOUCH    - touch command
-                        W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command.
+                                (write and sample data back to userspace)
+                        W1_CMD_SEARCH   - search command
+                        W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command
        __u8 res        - reserved
-        __u16 len       - length of data for this command.
+        __u16 len       - length of data for this command
-                        For read command data must be allocated like for write command.
+                For read command data must be allocated like for write command
-        __u8 data[0]    - data for this command.
+        __u8 data[0]    - data for this command
-Each connector message can include one or more w1_netlink_msg with zero of more attached w1_netlink_cmd messages.
+Each connector message can include one or more w1_netlink_msg with
+zero or more attached w1_netlink_cmd messages.
-For event messages there are no w1_netlink_cmd embedded structures, only connector header
+For event messages there are no w1_netlink_cmd embedded structures,
-and w1_netlink_msg strucutre with "len" field being zero and filled type (one of event types)
+only connector header and w1_netlink_msg strucutre with "len" field
-and id - either 8 bytes of slave unique id in host order, or master's id, which is assigned
+being zero and filled type (one of event types) and id:
-to bus master device when it is added to w1 core.
+either 8 bytes of slave unique id in host order,
+or master's id, which is assigned to bus master device
+when it is added to w1 core.
+Currently replies to userspace commands are only generated for read
+command request. One reply is generated exactly for one w1_netlink_cmd
+read request. Replies are not combined when sent - i.e. typical reply
+messages looks like the following:
-Currently replies to userspace commands are only generated for read command request.
-One reply is generated exactly for one w1_netlink_cmd read request.
-Replies are not combined when sent - i.e. typical reply messages looks like the following:
 [cn_msg][w1_netlink_msg][w1_netlink_cmd]
-cn_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len;
+cn_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) +
+             sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) +
+             cmd->len;
 w1_netlink_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len;
 w1_netlink_cmd.len = cmd->len;
+Replies to W1_LIST_MASTERS should send a message back to the userspace
+which will contain list of all registered master ids in the following
+format:
+        cn_msg (CN_W1_IDX.CN_W1_VAL as id, len is equal to sizeof(struct
+        w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multipled by 4)
+        w1_netlink_msg (type: W1_LIST_MASTERS, len is equal to
+                number of masters multiplied by 4 (u32 size))
+        id0 ... idN
+        Each message is at most 4k in size, so if number of master devices
+        exceeds this, it will be split into several messages,
+        cn.seq will be increased for each one.
+W1 search and alarm search commands.
+request:
+[cn_msg]
+  [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD
+        id is equal to the bus master id to use for searching]
+  [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_SEARCH or W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH]
+reply:
+  [cn_msg, ack = 1 and increasing, 0 means the last message,
+        seq is equal to the request seq]
+  [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD]
+  [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_SEARCH or W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH
+        len is equal to number of IDs multiplied by 8]
+  [64bit-id0 ... 64bit-idN]
+Length in each header corresponds to the size of the data behind it, so
+w1_netlink_cmd->len = N * 8; where N is number of IDs in this message.
+        Can be zero.
+w1_netlink_msg->len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + N * 8;
+cn_msg->len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) +
+              sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) +
+              N*8;
+W1 reset command.
+[cn_msg]
+  [w1_netlink_msg type = W1_MASTER_CMD
+        id is equal to the bus master id to use for searching]
+  [w1_netlink_cmd cmd = W1_CMD_RESET]
+Command status replies.
+======================
+Each command (either root, master or slave with or without w1_netlink_cmd
+structure) will be 'acked' by the w1 core. Format of the reply is the same
+as request message except that length parameters do not account for data
+requested by the user, i.e. read/write/touch IO requests will not contain
+data, so w1_netlink_cmd.len will be 0, w1_netlink_msg.len will be size
+of the w1_netlink_cmd structure and cn_msg.len will be equal to the sum
+of the sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) and sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd).
+If reply is generated for master or root command (which do not have
+w1_netlink_cmd attached), reply will contain only cn_msg and w1_netlink_msg
+structires.
+w1_netlink_msg.status field will carry positive error value
+(EINVAL for example) or zero in case of success.
+All other fields in every structure will mirror the same parameters in the
+request message (except lengths as described above).
+Status reply is generated for every w1_netlink_cmd embedded in the
+w1_netlink_msg, if there are no w1_netlink_cmd structures,
+reply will be generated for the w1_netlink_msg.
+All w1_netlink_cmd command structures are handled in every w1_netlink_msg,
+even if there were errors, only length mismatch interrupts message processing.
 Operation steps in w1 core when new command is received.
 =======================================================
-When new message (w1_netlink_msg) is received w1 core detects if it is master of slave request,
+When new message (w1_netlink_msg) is received w1 core detects if it is
-according to w1_netlink_msg.type field.
+master or slave request, according to w1_netlink_msg.type field.
 Then master or slave device is searched for.
-When found, master device (requested or those one on where slave device is found) is locked.
+When found, master device (requested or those one on where slave device
-If slave command is requested, then reset/select procedure is started to select given device.
+is found) is locked. If slave command is requested, then reset/select
+procedure is started to select given device.
 Then all requested in w1_netlink_msg operations are performed one by one.
 If command requires reply (like read command) it is sent on command completion.
@@ -82,8 +170,8 @@ Connector [1] specific documentation.
 Each connector message includes two u32 fields as "address".
 w1 uses CN_W1_IDX and CN_W1_VAL defined in include/linux/connector.h header.
 Each message also includes sequence and acknowledge numbers.
-Sequence number for event messages is appropriate bus master sequence number increased with
+Sequence number for event messages is appropriate bus master sequence number
-each event message sent "through" this master.
+increased with each event message sent "through" this master.
 Sequence number for userspace requests is set by userspace application.
 Sequence number for reply is the same as was in request, and
 acknowledge number is set to seq+1.
@@ -93,6 +181,6 @@ Additional documantion, source code examples.
 ============================================
 1. Documentation/connector
-2. http://tservice.net.ru/~s0mbre/archive/w1
+2. http://www.ioremap.net/archive/w1
-This archive includes userspace application w1d.c which
+This archive includes userspace application w1d.c which uses
-uses read/write/search commands for all master/slave devices found on the bus.
+read/write/search commands for all master/slave devices found on the bus.
diff --git a/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m b/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7dffd8919cb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/wimax/README.i2400m
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+   Driver for the Intel Wireless Wimax Connection 2400m
+   (C) 2008 Intel Corporation < linux-wimax@intel.com >
+   This provides a driver for the Intel Wireless WiMAX Connection 2400m
+   and a basic Linux kernel WiMAX stack.
+1. Requirements
+     * Linux installation with Linux kernel 2.6.22 or newer (if building
+       from a separate tree)
+     * Intel i2400m Echo Peak or Baxter Peak; this includes the Intel
+       Wireless WiMAX/WiFi Link 5x50 series.
+     * build tools:
+          + Linux kernel development package for the target kernel; to
+            build against your currently running kernel, you need to have
+            the kernel development package corresponding to the running
+            image installed (usually if your kernel is named
+            linux-VERSION, the development package is called
+            linux-dev-VERSION or linux-headers-VERSION).
+          + GNU C Compiler, make
+2. Compilation and installation
+2.1. Compilation of the drivers included in the kernel
+   Configure the kernel; to enable the WiMAX drivers select Drivers >
+   Networking Drivers > WiMAX device support. Enable all of them as
+   modules (easier).
+   If USB or SDIO are not enabled in the kernel configuration, the options
+   to build the i2400m USB or SDIO drivers will not show. Enable said
+   subsystems and go back to the WiMAX menu to enable the drivers.
+   Compile and install your kernel as usual.
+2.2. Compilation of the drivers distributed as an standalone module
+   To compile
+$ cd source/directory
+$ make
+   Once built you can load and unload using the provided load.sh script;
+   load.sh will load the modules, load.sh u will unload them.
+   To install in the default kernel directories (and enable auto loading
+   when the device is plugged):
+$ make install
+$ depmod -a
+   If your kernel development files are located in a non standard
+   directory or if you want to build for a kernel that is not the
+   currently running one, set KDIR to the right location:
+$ make KDIR=/path/to/kernel/dev/tree
+   For more information, please contact linux-wimax@intel.com.
+3. Installing the firmware
+   The firmware can be obtained from http://linuxwimax.org or might have
+   been supplied with your hardware.
+   It has to be installed in the target system:
+     *
+$ cp FIRMWAREFILE.sbcf /lib/firmware/i2400m-fw-BUSTYPE-1.3.sbcf
+     * NOTE: if your firmware came in an .rpm or .deb file, just install
+       it as normal, with the rpm (rpm -i FIRMWARE.rpm) or dpkg
+       (dpkg -i FIRMWARE.deb) commands. No further action is needed.
+     * BUSTYPE will be usb or sdio, depending on the hardware you have.
+       Each hardware type comes with its own firmware and will not work
+       with other types.
+4. Design
+   This package contains two major parts: a WiMAX kernel stack and a
+   driver for the Intel i2400m.
+   The WiMAX stack is designed to provide for common WiMAX control
+   services to current and future WiMAX devices from any vendor; please
+   see README.wimax for details.
+   The i2400m kernel driver is broken up in two main parts: the bus
+   generic driver and the bus-specific drivers. The bus generic driver
+   forms the drivercore and contain no knowledge of the actual method we
+   use to connect to the device. The bus specific drivers are just the
+   glue to connect the bus-generic driver and the device. Currently only
+   USB and SDIO are supported. See drivers/net/wimax/i2400m/i2400m.h for
+   more information.
+   The bus generic driver is logically broken up in two parts: OS-glue and
+   hardware-glue. The OS-glue interfaces with Linux. The hardware-glue
+   interfaces with the device on using an interface provided by the
+   bus-specific driver. The reason for this breakup is to be able to
+   easily reuse the hardware-glue to write drivers for other OSes; note
+   the hardware glue part is written as a native Linux driver; no
+   abstraction layers are used, so to port to another OS, the Linux kernel
+   API calls should be replaced with the target OS's.
+5. Usage
+   To load the driver, follow the instructions in the install section;
+   once the driver is loaded, plug in the device (unless it is permanently
+   plugged in). The driver will enumerate the device, upload the firmware
+   and output messages in the kernel log (dmesg, /var/log/messages or
+   /var/log/kern.log) such as:
+...
+i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: firmware interface version 8.0.0
+i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: WiMAX interface wmx0 (00:1d:e1:01:94:2c) ready
+   At this point the device is ready to work.
+   Current versions require the Intel WiMAX Network Service in userspace
+   to make things work. See the network service's README for instructions
+   on how to scan, connect and disconnect.
+5.1. Module parameters
+   Module parameters can be set at kernel or module load time or by
+   echoing values:
+$ echo VALUE > /sys/module/MODULENAME/parameters/PARAMETERNAME
+   To make changes permanent, for example, for the i2400m module, you can
+   also create a file named /etc/modprobe.d/i2400m containing:
+options i2400m idle_mode_disabled=1
+   To find which parameters are supported by a module, run:
+$ modinfo path/to/module.ko
+   During kernel bootup (if the driver is linked in the kernel), specify
+   the following to the kernel command line:
+i2400m.PARAMETER=VALUE
+5.1.1. i2400m: idle_mode_disabled
+   The i2400m module supports a parameter to disable idle mode. This
+   parameter, once set, will take effect only when the device is
+   reinitialized by the driver (eg: following a reset or a reconnect).
+5.2. Debug operations: debugfs entries
+   The driver will register debugfs entries that allow the user to tweak
+   debug settings. There are three main container directories where
+   entries are placed, which correspond to the three blocks a i2400m WiMAX
+   driver has:
+     * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/ for the generic WiMAX stack
+       controls
+     * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/i2400m for the i2400m generic
+       driver controls
+     * /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:DEVNAME/i2400m-usb (or -sdio) for the
+       bus-specific i2400m-usb or i2400m-sdio controls).
+   Of course, if debugfs is mounted in a directory other than
+   /sys/kernel/debug, those paths will change.
+5.2.1. Increasing debug output
+   The files named *dl_* indicate knobs for controlling the debug output
+   of different submodules:
+     *
+# find /sys/kernel/debug/wimax\:wmx0 -name \*dl_\*
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_tx
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_rx
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_notif
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_fw
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m-usb/dl_usb
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_tx
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_rx
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_rfkill
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_netdev
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_fw
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_debugfs
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_driver
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_control
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_stack
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_rfkill
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_reset
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_msg
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_debugfs
+   By reading the file you can obtain the current value of said debug
+   level; by writing to it, you can set it.
+   To increase the debug level of, for example, the i2400m's generic TX
+   engine, just write:
+$ echo 3 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/dl_tx
+   Increasing numbers yield increasing debug information; for details of
+   what is printed and the available levels, check the source. The code
+   uses 0 for disabled and increasing values until 8.
+5.2.2. RX and TX statistics
+   The i2400m/rx_stats and i2400m/tx_stats provide statistics about the
+   data reception/delivery from the device:
+$ cat /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/rx_stats
+45 1 3 34 3104 48 480
+   The numbers reported are
+     * packets/RX-buffer: total, min, max
+     * RX-buffers: total RX buffers received, accumulated RX buffer size
+       in bytes, min size received, max size received
+   Thus, to find the average buffer size received, divide accumulated
+   RX-buffer / total RX-buffers.
+   To clear the statistics back to 0, write anything to the rx_stats file:
+$ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m_rx_stats
+   Likewise for TX.
+   Note the packets this debug file refers to are not network packet, but
+   packets in the sense of the device-specific protocol for communication
+   to the host. See drivers/net/wimax/i2400m/tx.c.
+5.2.3. Tracing messages received from user space
+   To echo messages received from user space into the trace pipe that the
+   i2400m driver creates, set the debug file i2400m/trace_msg_from_user to
+   1:
+     *
+$ echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/i2400m/trace_msg_from_user
+5.2.4. Performing a device reset
+   By writing a 0, a 1 or a 2 to the file
+   /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/reset, the driver performs a warm (without
+   disconnecting from the bus), cold (disconnecting from the bus) or bus
+   (bus specific) reset on the device.
+5.2.5. Asking the device to enter power saving mode
+   By writing any value to the /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0 file, the
+   device will attempt to enter power saving mode.
+6. Troubleshooting
+6.1. Driver complains about 'i2400m-fw-usb-1.2.sbcf: request failed'
+   If upon connecting the device, the following is output in the kernel
+   log:
+i2400m_usb 5-4:1.0: fw i2400m-fw-usb-1.3.sbcf: request failed: -2
+   This means that the driver cannot locate the firmware file named
+   /lib/firmware/i2400m-fw-usb-1.2.sbcf. Check that the file is present in
+   the right location.
diff --git a/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax b/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b78c4378084e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/wimax/README.wimax
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+   Linux kernel WiMAX stack
+   (C) 2008 Intel Corporation < linux-wimax@intel.com >
+   This provides a basic Linux kernel WiMAX stack to provide a common
+   control API for WiMAX devices, usable from kernel and user space.
+1. Design
+   The WiMAX stack is designed to provide for common WiMAX control
+   services to current and future WiMAX devices from any vendor.
+   Because currently there is only one and we don't know what would be the
+   common services, the APIs it currently provides are very minimal.
+   However, it is done in such a way that it is easily extensible to
+   accommodate future requirements.
+   The stack works by embedding a struct wimax_dev in your device's
+   control structures. This provides a set of callbacks that the WiMAX
+   stack will call in order to implement control operations requested by
+   the user. As well, the stack provides API functions that the driver
+   calls to notify about changes of state in the device.
+   The stack exports the API calls needed to control the device to user
+   space using generic netlink as a marshalling mechanism. You can access
+   them using your own code or use the wrappers provided for your
+   convenience in libwimax (in the wimax-tools package).
+   For detailed information on the stack, please see
+   include/linux/wimax.h.
+2. Usage
+   For usage in a driver (registration, API, etc) please refer to the
+   instructions in the header file include/linux/wimax.h.
+   When a device is registered with the WiMAX stack, a set of debugfs
+   files will appear in /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmxX can tweak for
+   control.
+2.1. Obtaining debug information: debugfs entries
+   The WiMAX stack is compiled, by default, with debug messages that can
+   be used to diagnose issues. By default, said messages are disabled.
+   The drivers will register debugfs entries that allow the user to tweak
+   debug settings.
+   Each driver, when registering with the stack, will cause a debugfs
+   directory named wimax:DEVICENAME to be created; optionally, it might
+   create more subentries below it.
+2.1.1. Increasing debug output
+   The files named *dl_* indicate knobs for controlling the debug output
+   of different submodules of the WiMAX stack:
+     *
+# find /sys/kernel/debug/wimax\:wmx0 -name \*dl_\*
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_stack
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_rfkill
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_reset
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_op_msg
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_debugfs
+/sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/.... # other driver specific files
+       NOTE: Of course, if debugfs is mounted in a directory other than
+       /sys/kernel/debug, those paths will change.
+   By reading the file you can obtain the current value of said debug
+   level; by writing to it, you can set it.
+   To increase the debug level of, for example, the id-table submodule,
+   just write:
+$ echo 3 > /sys/kernel/debug/wimax:wmx0/wimax_dl_id_table
+   Increasing numbers yield increasing debug information; for details of
+   what is printed and the available levels, check the source. The code
+   uses 0 for disabled and increasing values until 8.
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
index fcdc62b3c3d8..7b4596ac4120 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Protocol 2.07:	(Kernel 2.6.24) Added paravirtualised boot protocol.
                and KEEP_SEGMENTS flag in load_flags.
 Protocol 2.08:  (Kernel 2.6.26) Added crc32 checksum and ELF format
-                payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload length
+                payload. Introduced payload_offset and payload_length
                fields to aid in locating the payload.
 Protocol 2.09:  (Kernel 2.6.26) Added a field of 64-bit physical
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
index 169ad423a3d1..4f913857b8a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/zero-page.txt
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ protocol of kernel. These should be filled by bootloader or 16-bit
 real-mode setup code of the kernel. References/settings to it mainly
 are in:
-  include/asm-x86/bootparam.h
+  arch/x86/include/asm/bootparam.h
 Offset  Proto   Name            Meaning